Owner's Manual - Chevrolet · PDF file2015 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M In Brief ......

2k15_chev_corvette_22885403A.ai

(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

Spine = Printer Adjust

Color = Black

Date = 06/13/14

2015

chevrolet.com (U.S.)chevrolet.gm.ca (Canada)chevrolet.com.mx (Mexico)

22885403 A

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-7576293) - 2015 - crc - 6/17/14

2015 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-45Universal Remote System . . . . 5-52

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Performance DataRecorder (PDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-18Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-31Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-51Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-57

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46


2015 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCORVETTE are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22885403 A First Printing ©2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

{ Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints


Introduction v

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/ActiveHandling System

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Universal Remote System . . . 1-18Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Performance VehicleFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Car Wash Guidelines . . . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-5.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-5.

Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

3. Manual Shift Paddles (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode onpage 9-28.

Active Rev Match Paddles (IfEquipped). See Active RevMatch on page 9-33.

4. Instrument Cluster on page 5-7.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-2.

6. Instrument Panel StorageButton. See Instrument PanelStorage on page 4-1.

7. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-20.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-3.

9. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-4.

10. Infotainment on page 7-1.

11. Power Mirrors on page 2-20.

12. Head-Up Display Controls (IfEquipped). See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 5-29.

13. Hatch/Trunk Release Button.See Hatch (Trunk) onpage 2-14.

Intrusion and InclinationSensors Disable Switch. SeeVehicle Alarm System onpage 2-16.

14. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-18.

15. Hood Release (Out of View).See Hood on page 10-6.

16. Cruise Control on page 9-48.

17. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

18. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

19. Horn on page 5-2.

20. Bluetooth Controls. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Voice Recognition Controls.See Steering Wheel Controlson page 5-2.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

21. Keyless Ignition. See IgnitionPositions on page 9-19.

22. Driver and RedundantPassenger Heated andVentilated Seat Controls (IfEquipped). See Heated andVentilated Front Seats onpage 3-7.

23. Shift Lever (Manual Shown).See Automatic Transmissionon page 9-27 or ManualTransmission on page 9-31.

24. Mode Select Knob. SeeCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9-43.


1-4 In Brief

25. Electric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

26. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

27. Passenger TemperatureControl. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8-1.

Passenger Heated andVentilated Seat Controls (IfEquipped). See Heated andVentilated Front Seats onpage 3-7.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within range. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

The RKE transmitter is used to lockand unlock the doors may work upto 60 m (197 ft) away from thevehicle.

With Remote Start and ConvertibleTop Shown, Others Similar

Press the button to remove the key.The key can be used to open thevehicle and hatch/trunk if power tothe vehicle is lost. See Hatch(Trunk) on page 2-14.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock both doors.

Q : Press to lock both doors.

s : Press and hold to releasethe hatch/trunk.


In Brief 1-5

M : If equipped, press andrelease K and then immediately

press and holdM continuously toopen the convertible top all the way.Release the button to stopmovement. This button will onlyopen the convertible top.

See Convertible Top on page 2-27.

L : Press and release once toinitiate vehicle locator. Press andhold for three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. Press again or start thevehicle to stop panic alarm.

/ : If equipped, press and releaseQ and then immediately press andhold/ for at least four seconds tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, this feature allows theengine to be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately after completingStep 1, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.

3. To drive, have the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, pressthe brake pedal, and then startthe vehicle.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. After 30 seconds,repeat the steps if a 10 minuteextension is desired. Remote startcan be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-9.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door from theoutside, press Q or K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.


1-6 In Brief

Driver Door

1. Door Handle Sensor2. Power Door Lock Switch3. Door Latch Button

For Keyless Access, hold the RKEtransmitter within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor handle. Grip and press thedoor handle sensor (1). See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3. This featurecan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.

Passenger Door

To lock or unlock a door from theinside, use the power door lockswitch.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

To open a door from the inside,press the door latch button.

The fuel door is also locked andunlocked using these features.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2-13.

Loss of Vehicle ElectricalPower

If the vehicle has lost battery power,open the driver door manually.

From Inside the Vehicle

Pull the door release handle.


In Brief 1-7

From Outside the Vehicle

Use the key to open the hatch/trunk.

From Inside the Hatch/Trunk

Pull the manual door releasehandle.

Trunk ReleaseFor automatic transmissions, thevehicle must be in P (Park).

For manual transmissions, thevehicle must be off or stationarywith the parking brake set. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

To release the hatch/trunk:

. Press}.

. Press and holdi on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System onpage 2-2.


1-8 In Brief

. Press the hatch/trunk releasetouch pad with the RKEtransmitter within range or usethe key in the key cylinder. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2 and Keyson page 2-1.

See Hatch (Trunk) on page 2-14.

Windows

Pull up or press down on the switchto raise or lower the window. SeePower Windows on page 2-22.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)allows the power windows tooperate when the ignition is off. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-23.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.


In Brief 1-9

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-2.

Lumbar and BolsterAdjustment

To adjust the lumbar or bolstersupport (if equipped):. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease lumbar support.

. If equipped, press and hold thecontrol upward to increase ordownward to decrease the sidebolster support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-3.

Memory Features

If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and S(Exit) buttons on the driver door areused to manually save and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and power tilt andtelescoping steering column.

See Memory Seats on page 3-4 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.


1-10 In Brief

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Driver and Redundant PassengerControls

If equipped, the driver buttons areon the center stack. To operate, theignition must be on.

Press C or M on the left side of theclimate control panel to ventilate orheat the driver seat. A ventilatedseat has a fan that pulls or pushesair through the seat. The air is notcooled.

Passenger Controls

The passenger buttons are also onthe right side of the instrumentpanel under the air vent. Press L or{ to heat or ventilate the passengerseat. The driver can also turn on oroff the passenger heated andventilated seats using the buttonson the right side of the climatecontrol panel.

For driver and passenger controls,press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then to

the off setting. The indicator lightsshow three for the highest settingand one for the lowest. If the heatedseats are on high, the level mayautomatically be lowered afterapproximately 30 minutes.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3-7.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-8.


In Brief 1-11

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly on page 3-10.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-11.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-32.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbag

is affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-20.

The passenger airbag statusindicator lights on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-17.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors


1-12 In Brief

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press L (Left) or R (Right) toselect the mirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.

3. Return the switch to the centerto deselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2-20.

If the vehicle has the memoryfeature, a preferred mirror positioncan be stored. See Memory Seatson page 3-4.

To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror to clearlyview the area behind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

To avoid glare of the headlampsfrom behind, push the tab forwardfor daytime and pull it rearward fornighttime use.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, the mirror automaticallyreduces the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2-21.

Steering WheelAdjustment

Press the control to move the tiltand telescoping steering wheel upand down or forward and rearward.

Both the tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn positions can be stored withyour memory settings. See MemorySeats on page 3-4.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


In Brief 1-13

Interior LightingCourtesy Lamps

When any door or the hatch/trunk isopened, the interior lamps will comeon, unless it is bright outside.

To turn the courtesy lamps on or off,turn the instrument panel brightnessknob completely clockwise orcounterclockwise.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are in theoverhead console. The lamps go onwhen a door is opened. When thedoors are closed, press the lampbuttons to turn on each lamp.

Interior Light Control

The knob for this feature is on theleft side of the instrument panel.Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto brighten or dim the lights. Turnthe knob completely clockwise toturn the interior lights on.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6-5.

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamps

There are four positions:

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again. When released, thecontrol returns to the AUTOposition.

AUTO: Sets the exterior lamps toautomatic mode. AUTO mode turnsthe exterior lamps on and offdepending on how much light isavailable outside the vehicle.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6-3.


1-14 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

nL : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-2.


In Brief 1-15

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. A/C (Air Conditioning)

4. Air Delivery Modes

5. Defrost

6. SYNC

7. Fan Control

8. Driver and PassengerRedundant Heated andVentilated Front Seat Controls

9. Recirculation

10. Rear Window Defogger

Passenger Temperature Control

The passenger temperature controlis below the passenger sideair vent.

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.


1-16 In Brief

Transmission

Manual Paddle Shift(Automatic Transmission)

The Manual Paddle Shift systemcan be used in D (Drive) orM (Manual Mode). The system isactivated by pushing the left paddleto downshift and right paddle toupshift. The current gear will bedisplayed in the instrument cluster,or the Head-Up Display (HUD),if equipped.

The Manual Paddle Shift system willnot allow either an upshift or adownshift, if the vehicle speed is toofast or too slow, nor will it allow astart from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.

See Manual Mode on page 9-28.

Active Rev Match (ManualTransmission)

Vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission have Active Rev Match(ARM). ARM aids in smoothershifting by matching the enginespeed to the next selected gear.The system is normally off. It isactivated and deactivated bypressing either of the paddlesmarked REV MATCH on thesteering wheel. See Active RevMatch on page 9-33.

1–4 Shift Message (ManualTransmission)

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, when this DICmessage is displayed, the

transmission can only shift from1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead of1 (First) to 2 (Second).

For more information about shiftingfor the best fuel economy, seeManual Transmission on page 9-31.


In Brief 1-17

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Cruise Control

1 : Press to turn cruise control onor off. A white indicator comes on inthe instrument cluster when cruiseis turned on.

RES/+: If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET/–: Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-48.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.


1-18 In Brief

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press o to openapplication menus on the left. Pressp to open interaction menus on theright.

SEL: Press to open a menu orselect a menu item. Press and holdto reset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The RVC displays a view of thearea behind the vehicle, on theinfotainment system display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-51.

Power OutletsUse the accessory power outlet toplug in electrical equipment, such asa cell phone or MP3 player.

There are three accessory poweroutlets:. Inside the center console

storage compartment.. In front of the cupholder.. In the rear compartment.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-4.

Universal Remote System

This system, if equipped, provides away to replace up to three remotecontrol transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another person


In Brief 1-19

available to assist you withprogramming the Universal Remotesystem.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-52.

Roof PanelIf equipped with a removable roofpanel, there are three releaselatches. Two are at the front of theroof panel and one is at the rear ofthe roof panel. See “Removing theRoof Panel” under Roof Panel onpage 2-24.

Help may be needed to remove theroof panel. Always store the roofpanel properly in the rear storagecompartment.

For more information:. See “Storing the Roof Panel”

under Roof Panel on page 2-24.. See “Installing the Roof Panel”

under Roof Panel on page 2-24.

ConvertibleIf equipped, the convertible top canbe automatically opened andclosed. For step-by-stepinstructions, see Convertible Top onpage 2-27.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.

StabiliTrak is a computer controlledsystem that helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.This is accomplished by selectivelyapplying any one of the vehicle’sbrakes. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control,

press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak g button on the

center console. i illuminates inthe instrument cluster.


1-20 In Brief

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak g button,

until the Traction Off Light iand the StabiliTrak OFF Light gilluminate in the instrumentcluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak g button again toturn on both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-37.

The vehicle has Driver ModeControl and may have CompetitiveDriving Mode. See Driver ModeControl on page 9-39 andCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9-43.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-14.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-57.

Performance VehicleFeaturesChecking Engine Oil

Your vehicle may have a highperformance dry sump lubricationsystem. This system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system. See Engine Oilon page 10-12.

Check the oil level only after theengine has been thoroughly warmedup and then check between five and10 minutes of shutoff. This ensuresthat the oil level reading obtainedwill be accurate.

Brake Noise

Under certain weather or operatingconditions, occasional brake squealmay be heard with the vehicle's


In Brief 1-21

performance braking system. Thisbrake system is designed forsuperior fade resistance andconsistent operation using highperformance brake pads. Brakesqueal is normal and does not affectsystem performance.

Tire Chatter/Hop

When driving at slow speeds and invery tight turns, the vehicle mayhave tire chatter/hop. This conditionis normal and the vehicle does notrequire service.

Road Imperfections/Crown Effects

The vehicle's precise steering andhandling make it very responsive toroad surface feedback. A slight pullmay be felt in the steeringdepending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variationssuch as troughs or ruts. This isnormal and the vehicle does notrequire service.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message when it isnecessary to change the engine oiland filter. The oil life system shouldbe reset to 100% only following anoil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Scroll through the DIC InfoPages menu until theREMAINING OIL LIFEpercentage is displayed. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26.

2. Press and hold the SEL buttonon the DIC while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. The oil life willchange to 100%.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-18.

Car Wash Guidelines

{ Caution

Some automatic car washes cancause damage to the vehicle,wheels, or convertible top,if equipped. Automatic carwashes are not recommended,due to lack of clearance for theundercarriage and/or wide reartires and wheels. See "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Careon page 10-82

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.


1-22 In Brief

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

. Select Eco mode for improvedfuel economy. This will result inbetter Active Fuel Management(AFM) operation. See ActiveFuel Management® onpage 9-25.

. For recommended shift speeds,see Manual Transmission onpage 9-31.

Premium Fuel

Premium fuel is recommended. SeeFuel on page 9-53.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New Chevrolet owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance Program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,

Navigation, Connection, andDiagnostic Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. See OnStar Overviewon page 14-1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-13Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

DoorsHatch (Trunk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-18

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-20Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-21Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-21Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

RoofRoof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle witha Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key inside the RKE transmittercan be used to open the vehicle andhatch/trunk if power to the vehicle islost. See Hatch (Trunk) onpage 2-14.


Press the button near the bottom ofthe RKE transmitter to remove thekey. Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

This vehicle has a Keyless Accesssystem with pushbutton start. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-19 forinformation on starting the vehicle.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.

If locked out of the vehicle, contactRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.



. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See“Keyless Access Operation” later inthis section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.


Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote Lock,Unlock, Start” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed and Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout is enabled through thevehicle personalization, all doors willlock and then the driver door will

immediately unlock. See “UnlockedDoor Anti-Lockout” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45. If thepassenger door is open when Q ispressed, both doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-16.

When the doors are locked, the fueldoor is also locked.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door. Press again withinfive seconds to unlock both doors.When remotely unlocking thevehicle at night, the headlamps andback-up lamps will come on forabout 30 seconds to light yourapproach to the vehicle. The turnsignal indicators may flash toindicate unlocking. Memory seatpositions may be recalled whenunlocking the vehicle and when thedoor is open.



See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-45 and Memory Seats onpage 3-4.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-16.

When the doors are unlocked, thefuel door is also unlocked.

/ (Remote Start): If equipped,press and release Q and then

immediately press and hold/ for atleast four seconds to start theengine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-9.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release toinitiate vehicle locator. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirpsthree times. Press and holdL forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the

turn signal lamps flash for30 seconds, or untilL is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.

s (Hatch/Trunk): Press andhold to release the hatch/trunk.If the engine is running, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) for anautomatic transmission. For amanual transmission, the shift levermust be in Neutral with the parkingbrake set.

M (Convertible Top):If equipped, press and release K,then immediately press and holdM continuously to open all theway. Release the button to stopmovement. This button will onlyopen the convertible top.

Convertible Top. Do not try to start the vehicle

while using the RKE transmitterto open the convertible top.Release both the RKEtransmitter button and ENGINE

START/STOP button and wait afew seconds before starting thevehicle normally.

. The passive door unlock featuremay not operate properly whileusing the RKE transmitter toopen the convertible top.

Keyless Access Operation

This vehicle has the KeylessAccess system that lets you unlockand unlatch the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft) of the doorbeing opened. There will be a touchpad on the inside of the doorhandles.

The Keyless Access system can beprogrammed to unlock both doorson the first unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.



Keyless Unlocking

Press the door handle sensor tounlock and open the doors if theRKE transmitter is within range. SeeDoor Locks on page 2-11 and“Passive Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Passive Locking

Keyless Access will lock severalseconds after all doors are closed ifthe vehicle is off and at least onetransmitter has been removed ornone remain in the vehicle.

The fuel door will also lock atthis time.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize whether the doorsautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Passive Door Lock”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Temporary Disable PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable the passivelocking by pressing and holding Kon the interior door switch with adoor open for at least four seconds,or until three chimes are heard.Passive locking will then remaindisabled until Q on the interior dooris pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-45.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off and aremote is left in the vehicle, the hornwill chirp three times after bothdoors are closed. To turn on or off

see “Remote Left in Vehicle Alert”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the release touch pad to openthe trunk if the RKE transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased and



programmed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters programmedto it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.

1. The vehicle must be off and boththe recognized and newtransmitters must be with you.

2. Remove the key base from therecognized RKE transmitter.

3. Place the recognized transmitterin the cupholder.

4. Insert the vehicle key into thekey cylinder above the licenseplate.

5. Open the hatch/trunk.

6. Turn the key five times within10 seconds.

7. The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE # 3 or 4, up to 8.

8. Place the new transmitter in thesteering column transmitterpocket with the buttons facing upand the base toward the openingfacing the passenger side.

9. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

10. The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE # 4 or 5, up to 8.

11. Press K on each newlyprogrammed transmitter tocomplete the process.

12. To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 8–11. Press and hold theENGINE START/STOP buttonfor 12 seconds if programmingis complete.

Return the key base back intothe RKE transmitter.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all transmitters to beprogrammed must be present.

1. The vehicle must be off.



2. Remove the key from thetransmitter and insert the vehiclekey into the key cylinder abovethe license plate.

3. Open the hatch/trunk.

4. Turn the key five times within10 seconds.

The DIC message displaysREMOTE LEARN PENDINGPLEASE WAIT.

5. Return key base back into theRKE transmitter.

6. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

The DIC reads REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

7. Repeat Step 6 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the next

steps. The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE #1.

8. Place the new transmitter in thesteering column transmitterpocket with the buttons facing upand the base toward the openingfacing the passenger side.

9. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the new transmitter.

10. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress Q or K on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 9–10. When all additionaltransmitters are programmed,press and hold the ENGINESTART/STOP button forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display a NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET, THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE messagewhen you try to start the vehicle.See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5-38.



{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To start the vehicle:

1. Place the transmitter in thesteering column transmitterpocket with the buttons facing upand the base toward thepassenger side.

2. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

1. Press the button near the bottomof the transmitter and pull thekey out.



2. Use the oval base of the keyblade to separate the two halvesof the transmitter.

3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive sidefacing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Align the key release button andsnap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, this feature allows theengine to be started from up to 60 m(197 ft) away from the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear windowdefogger may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on duringremote start.

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats, if equipped, mayturn on automatically. See Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3-7.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, do notuse the remote start feature. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.



The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash. Thelamps flash to confirm therequest to remote start thevehicle has been received.

During the remote start, thedoors will be locked and theparking lamps will remain on aslong as the engine is running.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done.

3. To drive, have the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, pressthe brake pedal, and then startthe vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can also beextended by another 10 minutes,if during the first 10 minutesSteps 1–2 are repeated while theengine is still running. An extensioncan be requested, 30 seconds afterstarting. This provides a total of20 minutes.

The remote start can only beextended once per ignition cycle.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a remote start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

After two remote starts, the vehicle'signition must be changed to ON/RUN/START and then back to OFFbefore the remote start procedurecan be used again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and thenback off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate ifany of the following occur:. The ignition is in any mode other

than OFF.. The transmitter is in the vehicle.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.



. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers — especiallychildren — can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked it will not open. Youincrease the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash if the doors are notlocked. So, wear safety beltsproperly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock yourvehicle whenever youleave it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock from the outside,press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

1. Door Handle Sensor2. Power Door Lock Switch3. Door Latch Button

For Keyless Access, hold the RKEtransmitter within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor handle. Grip and press thedoor handle sensor (1) to open. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.When the passenger door is openedfirst, the driver door will also unlock.To program this feature, see VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.



To lock or unlock from the inside,use the power door lock switch (2).See Power Door Locks onpage 2-13.

To open a door from the inside,press the door latch button (3).

If the vehicle has lost battery power,the driver door can be openedmanually:

From inside the vehicle, pull thedoor release handle.

From outside the vehicle, use thekey to open the hatch/trunk. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

Pull the manual door releasehandle.



Power Door Locks

Driver Door

Passenger Door

To lock or unlock the doors and fueldoor from inside the vehicle, pressQ or K on a power door lockswitch. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate when the dooris locked.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the actuallocking of the doors untilfive seconds after all doors areclosed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout feature has beenturned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch with the door open,a chime will sound three timesindicating that delayed locking isactive.

The doors will then lockautomatically five seconds after alldoors are closed. If a door isreopened before five seconds have

elapsed, the five-second timer willreset once all the doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again, or press Q on the RKEtransmitter, to override this featureand lock the doors immediately.

Delayed locking can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) for automatictransmissions, or when vehiclespeed becomes faster than 13 km/h(8 mph) for manual transmissions,both doors will lock.

Use the power door unlock switch tounlock the door when the vehicle isnot in P (Park). When the door isclosed again, the doors will lock



either when your foot is removedfrom the brake or the vehicle speedbecomes faster than13 km/h (8 mph).

Automatic Door Unlock

The vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park) for automatic transmissionvehicles or when the ignition isturned off or is in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) for manualtransmission vehicles, both doorswill unlock.

With the vehicle stopped and theengine running, door unlocking canbe programmed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Thisallows the driver to choose variousunlock settings. For programminginformation, see VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,and the power door lock switch is

pressed with the driver door open,the doors will lock and only thedriver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and UnlockedDoor Anti-Lockout is turned on, thedriver door is open, and doorlocking is requested using a doorlock switch or the RKE transmitter,both doors will lock and only thedriver door will unlock. TheUnlocked Door Anti-Lockout featurecan be turned on or off using thevehicle personalization menus.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Lockout protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Doors

Hatch (Trunk)

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, hatch/trunk open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thehatch/trunk or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or hatch/trunk open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-26.

Hatch/Trunk Release

For automatic transmissions, thevehicle must be in P (Park).

For manual transmissions, thevehicle must be off or stationarywith the parking brake set. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

To release the hatch/trunk:

. Press}.

. Press and holdi on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System onpage 2-2.

Press the hatch/trunk release touchpad with the RKE transmitter withinrange or use the key in the keycylinder. See Keys on page 2-1.

Hatch/Trunk Closing

{ Caution

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in the rear storagecompartments located in thehatch/trunk area. The objectscould damage the underside ofthe hatch/trunk.



Use the pull cup to close the hatch/trunk with light force.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle (Convertible)

{ Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handle onthe trunk lid. This handle will glowfollowing exposure to light. Pull therelease handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

After use, return to the storedposition.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.



On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the hatch/trunkis open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:. Use the RKE transmitter.. Use the Keyless Access

system.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash indicating the alarm systemis operating. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second time

will bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated ifthe passenger door, the hatch/trunk,or the hood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated,do one of the following:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle after all

occupants have left the vehicleand both doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.



How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the transmitterand the horn chirps three times, aprevious alarm occurred while thesystem was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages onpage 5-42.

Inclination Sensor andIntrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have an inclinationsensor and intrusion sensor.

The inclination sensor can set offthe alarm if it senses movement ofthe vehicle, such as a change invehicle orientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do not

allow passengers or pets to remainin the vehicle when the intrusionsensor is activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:. Make sure both doors and

windows are completely closed.. Secure any loose items such as

sunshades.. Make sure there are no

obstructions blocking thesensors.

Intrusion and InclinationSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors bedeactivated if pets are left in thevehicle or the vehicle is beingtransported.

With the vehicle turned off, pressdto the right of the hatch/trunkrelease button. The indicator lightwill come on momentarily, indicating

that these sensors have beendisabled for the next alarm systemarming cycle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Immobilizer OperationThe vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The security light comes on in theinstrument cluster if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system. This lightalso comes on briefly when theengine is started.

The system is automatically armedwhen the ignition is turned off.



The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition is placedin ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters that are matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedRKE transmitter starts the vehicle.The vehicle may not start if the RKEtransmitter is damaged.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, there maybe a problem with the immobilizersystem. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button again.

If the vehicle does not start and theRKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another RKEtransmitter. Or, place the transmitterin the transmitter pocket. See “NOREMOTE DETECTED” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5-38.

Check the fuse. See Fuses onpage 10-39. If the engine still doesnot start with the other transmitter,the vehicle needs service. If theengine does start, the firsttransmitter may be faulty. See yourdealer or have a new RKEtransmitter programmed to thevehicle.

The immobilizer system can learnnew or replacement RKEtransmitters. Up to eight RKEtransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see “ProgrammingTransmitters to the Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press L (Left) or R (Right) toselect a mirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.

3. Return the switch to the centerto deselect the mirror.

If the vehicle has the memoryfeature, a preferred mirror positioncan be stored. See Memory Seatson page 3-4.

Folding MirrorsTo fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Heated Mirrors1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

Automatic DimmingMirrorThe driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps from behind.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:. The vehicle is shifted out of

R (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.



Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, there arethree buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

To avoid accidental OnStar calls,clean the mirror with the ignition off.Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorPush the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



Power Windows

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons; children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with theRKE transmitter in the vehicleand they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do notleave the RKE transmitter in avehicle with children.

Press the switch to the first detent tolower the window. Pull to the firstdetent to raise the window. Releaseto stop at the desired position.

If windows are operated repeatedlyin short intervals, window operationis disabled for a short time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)allows the use of the powerwindows when the ignition is off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-23.

Express Window Operation

This feature allows the window toautomatically open or close fully.. To activate express-down, press

the switch fully to the seconddetent and release.

. To activate express-up, pull theswitch fully to the second detentand release.

. To stop window movement,press or pull the switch briefly.

Obstacle Detection

This feature is active duringexpress-up movements in ON/RUN/START, or when the engine is offand RAP is active. Obstacledetection also works with RAP whenthe switch is held up.

If the window encounters an objectduring closing, it will stop and opento a predetermined distance.



Conditions such as severe cold orice may cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will returnto normal operation once thecondition or object is removed.

If conditions prevent a window fromclosing and the window continues toauto-reverse, it is possible to closethe window while in ON/RUN byholding the window switch in thefirst or second detent until thewindow is closed.

Window Operation withConvertible Top

Windows automatically lower fullywhen the convertible top is loweredor raised. See Convertible Top onpage 2-27. To raise the windows,pull the switch to the second detentand release.

Window Indexing

Indexing automatically lowers thewindow a small amount when thedoor is opened. When the door isclosed, the window will raise to itsfull up position. If either window

does not index properly, it could bedue to loss of power. Beforereturning to the dealer for service,perform the window indexing resetprocedure.

Window Indexing andExpress-Up Reset

Window indexing may be required ifthe vehicle battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, or is notworking. Express-up and theconvertible top will not function untilthe windows are reset. After batterypower is restored, a messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26.

Once power is restored:

1. Close the doors.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Hold the window switch up to thefully closed position.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.



Roof

Roof PanelIf equipped with a removable roofpanel, use the following proceduresto remove or install it.

{ Caution

If a roof panel is dropped orrested on its edges, the roofpanel, paint, and/orweatherstripping may bedamaged. Always place the roofpanel in the stowage receiversafter removing it from the vehicle.

Removing the Roof Panel

{ Warning

Do not remove a roof panel whilethe vehicle is moving. The panelcould fall into the vehicle and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

strike an occupant and cause youto lose control. It could also fly offand strike another vehicle.Remove the roof panel only whenthe vehicle is parked.

It may be necessary to have helpremoving the roof panel.

To remove:

1. Shift an automatic transmissioninto P (Park) or a manualtransmission into 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

2. Turn the ignition off and set theparking brake.

3. Lower both sun visors.

4. Open the rear hatch and removeany items that may interfere withproper storage of the roof panel.

5. Lower the windows.

There are two release handleson the front and one releasehandle on the rear of the roofpanel.

6. To unlock the front releasehandles, pull them outward,turning fully.



7. To unlock the rear release latch,press the button on the front ofthe release handle. The latchlever will open.

8. Stand on one side of the vehicle,and if necessary, have someonestand on the other side.Together, carefully lift the frontedge of the roof panel up andforward. Avoid dropping the rearedge downward.

9. When the roof panel is loose,grasp it as close to the center aspossible and lift it away from thevehicle.

Storing the Roof Panel

{ Warning

If a roof panel is not storedproperly, it could be thrown aboutthe vehicle in a crash or suddenmaneuver. People in the vehiclecould be injured. Always use thestowage receivers.

{ Caution

Dirt, dust, or other contaminantson the removable roof panel orcargo shade could cause damageto the finish of the roof panel if itis stored under the shade.Remove the cargo shade whenstoring the roof in the rearcompartment.

1. Turn the roof panel so that thefront edge of the panel is facingthe front of the vehicle.

2. Insert the front of the roof panelso that the indents lay on top ofthe receivers.



3. Line up the rear roof panel pinsso that they drop into thereceivers on the back of thestorage area.

4. Press down firmly to seat thepins in the rear receivers.

Installing the Roof Panel

{ Warning

An improperly attached roof panelmay fall into or fly off the vehicle.You or others could be injured.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

After installing the roof panel,always check that it is firmlyattached by pushing up on theunderside of the panel. Checknow and then to be sure the roofpanel is firmly in place.

{ Caution

Installing the roof with the releasehandles in the closed positioncould cause damage to theinterior trim. Always movehandles to the open positionwhen installing the roof.

It is easier if two people install theroof panel.

1. Shift an automatic transmissioninto P (Park). Shift a manualtransmission into 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

2. Turn the ignition off and set theparking brake.

3. To remove the roof panel, pull upon the rear edge and remove itfrom the storage area.

4. Carefully place the roof panelover the top of the vehicle.

5. Position the rear edge of the roofpanel next to the weatherstrip onthe back of the roof opening.Then align and fit the pins at therear of the roof panel inside theopenings in the rear overhead



weatherstrip. Gently lower thefront edge of the roof panel tothe front of the roof opening.

6. Make sure the front releasehandles are in the full openposition.

7. Push the roof firmly downward toengage the pins.

8. Turn the front release handlesinward so that they fully latch tothe closed position. It is criticalthat the handles fully latch.

9. Push back and up on the rearrelease handle to insert the hookin the loop.

10. Push and pull the roof panel upand down and side to side toensure the roof panel issecurely installed.

Maintaining the Roof Panel

{ Caution

Using glass cleaner on a paintedroof panel could damage thepanel. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not use glass cleaner on thepainted roof panel.

When cleaning, removing, and/orstoring the roof panel:. Flush with water to remove dust

and dirt, then dry the panel.. Do not use abrasive cleaning

materials on the panel.

Convertible TopIf equipped with a convertible top,review the following beforeoperating:

{ Warning

While opening or closing theconvertible top, people can beinjured by the moving parts of thetonneau cover or convertible top.Maintain visual contact with thetop while it is being operated.

{ Caution

Follow these guidelines whenoperating the convertible top ordamage can occur:

. Remove all items from theroof, trunk lid, or tonneaucover before operating.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

. Remove all objects from thetrunk that may contact theconvertible top when it isoperated.

. Do not leave the vehicle withthe convertible top open.

. Do not exceed 50 km/h(31 mph) until the top hascompletely closed or opened.

. Do not open or close the topwhile driving in high windconditions.

. Do not operate theconvertible top multiple timesin a short period of timewithout starting the engine toavoid draining the vehiclebattery.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not open or store theconvertible top when it is dirtyor wet. This could result instains, mildew, or otherdamage.

. Only store the vehicle withthe top fully closed.

Opening the Convertible Top —Instrument Panel Switch

1. Remove all objects from the topof the tonneau cover andforward of the partition. Placethe partition in the rear storagearea in the upright position.Fasten both sides of the partitionto the posts just below thetonneau cover. See RearStorage on page 4-2.

2. Close the trunk.

3. Start the vehicle or place it inACC/ACCESSORY.

4. When possible, operate theconvertible top when the vehicleis stopped. The top can beoperated while driving below50 km/h (31 mph) and will stop ifthat speed is exceeded. The topoperation will take approximately25 seconds. Make sure the topoperation can be completedbefore that speed is reached.

5. Press and hold the bottom ofM. The windows willautomatically lower.



6. After the convertible top iscompletely open, a chimesounds and a DIC messagedisplays. Release the switch.

If the radio is on, the sound may bemuted for a brief time due to a newaudio system equalization beingloaded.

Opening the Convertible Top —RKE Transmitter

1. Make sure the vehicle is off.

2. The trunk partition must alreadybe in place and the trunk closed.

3. Keep visual contact with thevehicle. Press and release K onthe RKE transmitter and thenquickly press and holdM.

4. HoldM until the top iscompletely opened and theexterior lamps flash. A chime willsound.

If the top stops before it hascompletely opened, press K and

then pressM again.

If the top still stops opening try thefollowing:. Move closer to the vehicle.

. HoldM until the operation iscomplete.

. Interference from other RKEtransmitters or devices mayinterrupt the operation. Press Kand thenM again. If the topstill does not open use theconvertible switch in the vehicle.

The convertible top cannot beclosed using the RKE transmitter.

See Rear Storage on page 4-2.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Closing the Convertible Top

1. Remove all objects from the topof the tonneau cover andforward of the partition. Placethe partition in the rear storagearea in the upright position.Fasten both sides of the partition

to the posts just below thetonneau cover. See RearStorage on page 4-2.

2. Close the trunk.

3. Start the vehicle or place it inACC/ACCESSORY.

4. When possible, operate theconvertible top when the vehicleis stopped. The top can beoperated while driving below50 km/h (31 mph) and will stop ifthat speed is exceeded. The topoperation will take approximately25 seconds. Make sure the topoperation can be completedbefore that speed is reached.



5. Press and hold the top ofM.The windows will automaticallylower.

6. After the convertible top iscompletely closed, a chimesounds and a DIC messagedisplays. Release the switch.Raise the windows if needed.

If the radio is on, the sound may bemuted for a brief time due to a newaudio system equalization beingloaded.

Troubleshooting

Check the following if theconvertible top switchM is notoperating:. The ignition should be in ACC/

ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) should be active.

. The trunk lid should be closedand the trunk partition in place.A DIC message will display.

. If the ONLY MANUALOPERATION OF TOPPOSSIBLE message isdisplayed on the DIC, see“Manual Movement of Top” laterin this section.

. At cooler outside temperatures,the convertible top may notopen. It is possible to close thetop down to temperatures ofabout −20°C (−4°F). A DICmessage will display if the topwill not open due to low

temperature. If necessary, movethe vehicle to a heated indoorarea to operate the top.

. If the top has recently beencycled repeatedly or left in anintermediate state, it will betemporarily disabled. A DICmessage displays. Normaloperation will be restored within10 minutes after the system hascooled.

. If the vehicle battery is low, thepower top operation may bedisabled. Try to start the vehicle.A DIC message displays.

. If the battery has recently beenreconnected or if the vehicle hasbeen jump started, the top maynot operate until the powerwindows have been indexed.Complete the power windowindexing procedure. See PowerWindows on page 2-22.

See Convertible Top Messages onpage 5-35.



Other features may be affectedwhile operating the convertible top:. The trunk can only be opened

with the key until the convertibletop is completely opened orclosed.

. Do not try to start the vehiclewhile opening the top with theRKE transmitter. A DIC messagemay display. Release bothbuttons and wait a few secondsbefore starting the vehiclenormally.

. The passive door unlock featuremay not operate properly whileusing the RKE transmitter toopen the convertible top.

. The windows cannot close whilethe top is moving.

. When driving with the top notfully secured, chimes can beheard above 80 km/h (50 mph).

If the vehicle battery has beendisconnected and reconnected, thefuses were pulled or replaced, or ajump start was performed, the TOP

NOT SECURE message maydisplay. Press and holdM toopen/close the top until thismessage is cleared.


Partial Top Cycling

If the convertible top operation isstopped before completion, the topwill temporarily hold its position.If the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,the top will be held for up tofive minutes. If the vehicle is movingor off, the amount of time will varyfrom a few seconds to about aminute.

Beeps and DIC messages will bedisplayed before the top will move.When this occurs, immediately finishthe convertible top operation bypressing the button again until itcompletes.

If the top cannot be secured, keepclear of the top components. Insome conditions the top may movequickly.

Do not drive with the convertible topin an unsecured position. The topcomponents may moveunexpectedly. In some cases thetop may not be able to be poweroperated. If this occurs, follow theDIC messages displayed.

If the tonneau cover is not securedand latched, and the vehicle ismoving above 10 km/h (6 mph), thetonneau cover may automaticallymove to a stable position.




Manual Movement of Top

If the DIC displays the ONLYMANUAL OPERATION OF TOPPOSSIBLE message, follow thesesteps.

1. PressM to either open orclose the top. Press the switchin the opposite direction if onedoes not work.

2. If the top moves, continuepressing the switch in thatdirection for at leastfive seconds. The top shouldthen work normally.

If the top does not respond in eitherdirection, use the followingprocedure to manually adjust theconvertible top and tonneau cover ifthey are retracted but not latched.This requires more than one person.

1. On each side of the tonneaucover, lift and pivot rearward intothe fully open position.

2. Lift and pivot the convertible toprearward into the fully stowedposition.

If the convertible top does notoperate after this adjustment, closethe tonneau cover and take it toyour dealer for service.

Cleaning the Convertible Top

The convertible top should becleaned often. Do not usehigh-pressure car washes as thesemay cause water to enter thevehicle.



Hand wash the convertible top inpartial shade. Use mild soap,lukewarm water, and a soft sponge.A chamois or cloth may leave lint onthe top, and a brush can chafe thethreads in the top fabric. Do not usedetergents, harsh cleaners,solvents, or bleaching agents.

Wet the entire top and let the soapremain on the fabric for a fewminutes. Wash evenly to avoidspots or rings. When the top is verydirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner.Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle,then let the top dry in direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:. Make sure the convertible top is

completely dry before lowering it.. Do not get any cleaner on the

vehicle's painted finish; it couldleave streaks.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-2Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-16When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-25

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-25Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-31Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-33


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-3.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-3.

Seat Travel Limit

If a seat is moved all the way to therear and/or the seatback is reclinedso that it makes contact with thecarpet, all rearward seat movementwill stop. Normal operation of theseat will resume when the seatbackis no longer in contact with thecarpet. This is normal.



If a seat is folded forward, allrearward or downward seatmovement will stop. Normaloperation will resume when the seatis returned to an upright position.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar and bolstersupport (if equipped):. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease lumbar support.

. If equipped, press and hold thecontrol upward to increase ordownward to decrease the sidebolster support.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Memory Seats

If memory equipped, the "1," "2,"SET, and S (Exit) buttons on thedriver door are used to manuallysave and recall memory settings forthe driver seat, outside mirrors, andpower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn.

Storing Memory Positions

To save positions to the “1” and “2”buttons:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and the power tilt andtelescoping steering column tothe desired driving positions.

2. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

3. Immediately press and hold “1”until two beeps sound.

4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”

To save positions to the S (Exit)button and easy exit features:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and power tilt andtelescoping steering column tothe desired positions for gettingout of the vehicle.

2. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

3. Immediately press and hold Suntil two beeps sound.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

If the vehicle is OFF or not inP (Park), or parking brake is not seton a manual transmission, pressand hold "1," "2," or S to manuallyrecall the previously stored memorypositions. Releasing "1,” "2," or Sbefore the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

If the vehicle is ON and in P (Park),or parking brake is set on a manualtransmission, press and release “1,”“2,” or S to manually recall thepreviously stored memory positions.Placing the ignition in OFF beforethe stored positions are reachedstops the recall.

Automatically Recalling MemoryPositions (Auto Memory Recall)

The Auto (Automatic) MemoryRecall feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored“1” or “2” position when entering thevehicle.



Depending upon the Auto MemoryRecall feature enabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu, memory “1”or “2” positions are recalled asfollows:

To activate the recall when theignition is off, and “On - Driver DoorOpen” is selected in the vehiclepersonalization menu:

. Press K on the RKE transmitterand open the door.

. Press the lock/unlock button onthe outside driver door handleand open the driver door. TheRKE transmitter must be presentfor the recall to activate.

. If the driver door is alreadyopen, press K on the RKEtransmitter to activate the recall.

To activate the recall at ignition ON,the transmission must be in P (Park)or the parking brake set for amanual transmission, and “On - AtIgnition On” selected in the vehiclepersonalization menu:. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/

START.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls, or press thepower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn control. If On - At IgnitionOn is selected in the vehiclepersonalization menu, placing theignition in OFF stops the recall.

Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the easy exitfeature automatically moves thedriver seat, power tilt andtelescoping steering column, andoutside mirrors on some vehicles tothe memory positions previously

saved to the S (Exit) button. See“Storing Memory Positions” listedpreviously. See also VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.

Easy exit recall automaticallyactivates when one of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is turned off and the

driver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

Seat Travel Limit

If the seat is folded forward ormoved rearward into contact withthe carpet, the seat must bereturned to an upright position ormoved forward off the carpet toregain operation.



Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power tilt andtelescoping steering column whilerecalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction. Then do one of thefollowing:. If manually recalling the position,

press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memoryitem that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling againby pressing the appropriatememory button.

. If automatically recalling theposition, press and hold theappropriate manual control forthe memory item that is notrecalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling again by opening thedriver door and pressing K onthe RKE transmitter.

. If recalling the exit position,press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the exit

feature not recalling fortwo seconds. Then try recallingthe exit position again.

If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Seatback Latches

If equipped, lift the latch to fold aseatback forward.

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return a seatback to the sittingposition, push the seatbackrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it is locked inplace.

In some vehicles, when theseatback is folded forward, somepower seat adjustments may not beavailable. See Power SeatAdjustment on page 3-2 andReclining Seatbacks on page 3-3.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Driver and Redundant PassengerControls

If equipped, the driver buttons areon the center stack. To operate, theignition must be on.

Press C or M on the left side of theclimate control panel to ventilate orheat the driver seat. A ventilatedseat has a fan that pulls or pushesair through the seat. The air is notcooled.

Passenger Controls

The passenger buttons are also onthe right side of the instrumentpanel under the air vent. Press L or{ to heat or ventilate the passengerseat. The driver can also turn on oroff the passenger heated andventilated seats using the buttonson the right side of the climatecontrol panel.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lights



show three for the highest settingand one for the lowest. If the heatedseats are on high, the level mayautomatically be lowered afterapproximately 30 minutes.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start (if equipped),the heated or ventilated seats canbe turned on automatically. When itis cold outside, the heated seatsturn on, and when it is hot outsidethe ventilated seats turn on. Theheated or ventilated seats arecanceled when the ignition is turnedon. Press the heated or ventilatedseat button to use the heated orventilated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-9and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-15.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.



Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-26 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-28.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

. Always wear the shoulderbelt over the shoulder andacross the chest. Use thesafety belt guide, if needed,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

to position the shoulder beltover the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

GT Seat Shown, CompetitionSport Seat Similar

1. The seat has a safety belt guide.The safety belt guide helpsposition the shoulder belt overthe shoulder and across thechest of smaller adults and ofolder children who haveoutgrown booster seats. To usethe safety belt guide, slide theedge of the belt webbing through

the opening on the guide. Besure the belt is not twisted. If achild will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children on page 3-26or Infants and Young Childrenon page 3-28.

2. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



3. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-13.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.



They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-14.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer



to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-15.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-14.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies and safety beltguides inspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-16.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-17.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keep

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

you in position before and duringa crash. Always wear the safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-26 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-28.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-16.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-15. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrain



the occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-16.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.



Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-17 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-16.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuel

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

system, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another

crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag system.Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-17.



The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Rear-facing child restraints shouldnot be transported in the vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. A front outboard passenger

takes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.



When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-17.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle who

has outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints onpage 3-33. Even if the childrestraint is equipped with asafety belt lock-off, make surethe safety belt retractor is lockedby pulling the shoulder belt all



the way out of the retractorbefore tightening the safety belt.When the retractor lock is set,the belt can be tightened but notpulled out of the retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking feature willbe engaged. This mayunintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-25 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.



{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and

diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent proper

deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-20.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-16.



{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-16. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-16.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided by



appropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child's



weight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected by

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPST

availability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)Some child restraints have a LATCHsystem. As part of the LATCHsystem, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a toptether. The LATCH system can helphold the child restraint in placeduring driving or in a crash. Somevehicles have lower and/or top



tether anchors designed to secure achild restraint with lowerattachments and/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a toptether are designed to be usedwhether the top tether is anchoredor not. Other child restraints requirethat the top tether be anchored.A national or local law may requirethat the top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

Your vehicle does not have loweranchors or top tether anchors tosecure a child restraint with theLATCH system. If a national or locallaw requires that your top tether beanchored, do not use a childrestraint in this vehicle because atop tether cannot be properlyanchored. You must use the safetybelts to secure your child restraint inthis vehicle, unless a national orlocal law requires that the top tetherbe anchored. Refer to the child

restraint instructions andinstructions in this manual forsecuring a child restraint using thevehicle's safety belts. See SecuringChild Restraints on page 3-33.

Securing Child RestraintsThis vehicle has airbags. Inaddition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-20 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-17 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-20 for additionalinformation.

Rear-facing child restraints shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-17.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

Remove the safety belt from theguide by sliding the webbingthrough the opening on the

guide. Do not secure the childrestraint with the safety beltrouted through the guide.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 3-20 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Return the safety belt into the guideby sliding the webbing through theopening on the guide.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Press the button to lower the displayand access the storage behind it.

There is a USB port in the upper lefthand corner. See “Audio Players” inthe infotainment manual.

Press the button again to raise thedisplay and close the storage area.

The storage area cannot beoperated when Valet Mode,if equipped, is enabled. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.

Keep the storage area closed whennot in use.


4-2 Storage

Glove Box

To open, press the button.If equipped, the glove box lockswhen Valet Mode is enabled. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Cupholders

Press the top of the cover to accessthe cupholders. There is aremovable divider.

Rear Storage

{ Caution

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in the rear storagecompartments located in the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

hatch/trunk area. The objectscould damage the underside ofthe hatch/trunk.

Convertible Shown, Coupe Similar

There is storage on the driver sidein the floor of the hatch/trunk area.Pull up to open the cover.

Rear Trunk Partition

If equipped with a convertible top,there is a trunk partition to keepcargo from getting in the way of the


Storage 4-3

convertible top. The trunk partitionmust be in place for the convertibletop to move. If the trunk partition isnot properly in place, a message willdisplay and a noise will be heard.See Convertible Top Messages onpage 5-35.

Convertible Only

Pull the divider up and snap it intoplace on both sides of the trunk.

The trunk partition is a flat carpetedboard with a horizontal flap that canbe attached to the top of the trunk toprovide additional storage space.

With the convertible top up, thetrunk partition can be unsnappedand laid flat to increase trunk cargospace.

Center Console Storage

{ Caution

The area inside the console canget hot. Do not store items thatcan be damaged by heat.

To open, press the button on thedriver side.

There are two USB ports, anaccessory outlet, and an SD cardreader inside. See Power Outlets onpage 5-4 and “Audio Players” in theinfotainment manual.


4-4 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverIf equipped, the cargo coverprovides hidden storage in the reararea of the vehicle. The cover alsoblocks glare from the removableroof when it is stored in the rearcompartment.

The cargo cover has two pieces: aflat and an L-shaped piece.

Attaching the Flat Cargo Cover

Attach the elastic loops on the fourcorners of the cargo cover to thehooks on the front and rear cornersof the hatch.

Attaching the L-Shaped CargoCover

1. Attach the plastic loops on thecover to the tie-downs on thefloor (1) and to the sidepanels (2).

2. Attach the rear loops on thecover to the hooks on the sidepanels (3).

Do not use the cargo cover hooksand tie-downs to secure anythingbut the cargo cover. They are notdesigned for heavy loads.


Storage 4-5

Convenience Net

The vehicle may have aconvenience net to be used forsmall loads. Attach the net to thehooks on the rear of the storagearea. The net should not be used tostore heavy loads.


4-6 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-2Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-23

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-25Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-29

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-35Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-36Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-36Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-37Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-38Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-38Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-38Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-42Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-42Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-44Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-45Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-45

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-52Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

Press the control to move the tiltand telescoping steering wheel upand down or forward and rearward.

Both the tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn positions can be stored withyour memory settings. See MemorySeats on page 3-4.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.



With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

1X (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-36.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are on LO, HI, or INT, theywill immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray washer fluid and

activate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached. When the lever isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-28 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the center stack. Thecompass receives its heading andother information from the Global



Positioning System (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5-35 for themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See “Home Page” in theinfotainment manual for informationabout how to use the menu system.

Setting the Time

To set the time:

1. From the Home Page, press theSETTINGS screen button andpress Time and Date.

2. Press Set Time and press + or −to increase or decrease hours,minutes, and AM or PM. Press12Hr or 24Hr for 12 or 24 hourclock.

3. Press } to go back to theprevious menu.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton and press Time and Date.

2. Press Set Date and press + or −to increase or decrease month,day, or year.


To set the clock display:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton and press Time and Date.

2. Press Clock Display and pressOFF or ON to turn the clockdisplay off or on.


Power OutletsUse the accessory power outlet toplug in electrical equipment, such asa cell phone or MP3 player.

There are three accessory poweroutlets:. In front of the cupholder. Open

the door compartment to access.. Inside the center console

storage compartment.. In the rear compartment.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.



The power outlets in front of thecupholder and inside the centerconsole storage compartment arepowered when the ignition is in ON/RUN/START or ACC/ACCESSORY,or until the driver door is openedwithin 10 minutes of turning off thevehicle. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-23.

The rear compartment power outletis powered at all times. Thevehicle’s battery may run down ifthe power outlet is used while theignition is in Stopping the Engine/OFF. Use this power outlet forplugging in the battery maintainer,if equipped.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to thetrunk outlet. Do not leaveelectrical equipment plugged inwhen the vehicle is not in usebecause the vehicle could catchfire and cause injury or death.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-57.

It is recommended that a qualifiedtechnician or dealer be seen for theproper installation of yourequipment.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Sport Theme Shown, Metric and Other Themes Similar



English Z06 Sport Theme Shown, Metric and Other Themes Similar



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

There are four instrument clusterdisplay configurations to choosefrom: Link to Drive Mode, Sport,Track, and Tour. The style of thecenter of the instrument cluster willchange depending on the themeselected. If Link to Drive Mode ischosen, the cluster configuration willchange to match the setting on thedriver mode control on the console.See Driver Mode Control onpage 9-39. If Weather or Eco areselected with the driver modecontrol, the cluster will display theTour theme.

Sport

Includes a circular tachometercentered in the display. The DIC iscontained within the tachometerring. Additionally, there are twoconfigurable pocket gauges in thelower left and right corners.

Track

Includes an asymmetric tachometerwith prominent red-line markingsand a lap timer that shows thecurrent, previous, and best lap.

Tour

Includes a partial tachometer ring.The DIC is contained within thetachometer ring. There is also an



area used to display icons orimages for the DIC or phonecontacts.

The instrument cluster displayconfiguration is selected through thecluster menu. See “Settings” under“Cluster Menu” following.

Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Usew orx to scrollthrough the list of applications.. Info. This is where you can view

the Driver Information Center(DIC) displays. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

. Performance

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation (If Equipped)

. Settings

Performance

Press SEL to enter the Performancemenu. Usew orx to scrollthrough the available items.

G-force: Gives the driver anindication of the vehicleperformance in cornering. TheG-force is displayed in the center ofthe DIC as a numerical value.

Friction Bubble: A four quadrantvisual display, indicative of the fourcorners of the car, with a “bubble”showing where the most inertia isbeing exerted on the vehicle.

Performance Timer: Press pwhen Performance Timer isdisplayed to enter the menu. Pressp while Set Start Speed ishighlighted then usew orx toenter the start speed. Press SEL tosave it. Press p while Set End

Speed is highlighted then usew orx to enter the end speed. PressSEL to save it. After the start andend speeds have been entered,press o to set the Sport display tothe set speeds and the performancetimer is ready to use. On the nextacceleration, the performance timewill record the time. To reset the



timer, highlight Reset on theperformance timer menu andpress SEL.

Lap Timer: Press p when LapTimer is displayed to start, stop,or reset the lap timer. A stopwatchicon will be displayed when the laptimer is active. Press SEL while theLap Timer page is active to start thetimer. If the lamp timer is active,pressing SEL on any page will stopthe current lap timer and start a newlap. Also, pressing and holding SELon any page will stop the lap timer.

Coolant Temperature: Shows thecurrent coolant temperature in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Oil Temperature: Shows thecurrent oil temperature in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Oil Pressure: Shows the current oilpressure in either kilopascal (kPa) orin pounds per square inch (psi).

Battery Voltage: Shows thecurrent battery voltage.

Transmission FluidTemperature: Shows thetemperature of the transmission fluidin either degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Tire Temperature: Shows tiretemperature status as either Cold,Warm, or Hot. Warm is typical fornormal driving while Hot is typicalfor aggressive driving. Unknownmay be displayed if tire temperatureinformation is unavailable.

eLSD and Wheel Slip: Displayswhen the Electronic Limited SlipDifferential (eLSD) is active andintervening with the vehicle’s normaloperation. The display also displaysslip percentage in a range of low,medium, and high. See Limited-SlipDifferential (Except Z51 and Z06) onpage 9-47 or Limited-SlipDifferential (Z51 and Z06 Only) onpage 9-47.

Audio

While the audio app is open, useworx to change the radio station orseek to the next or previous track,depending on the current audiosource. Press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menubrowse for music, select from thefavorites, or change the audiosource.

Phone

Press SEL to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recentcalls, or scroll through contacts.If there is an active call, mute orunmute the phone or switch tohandset or hands-free operation.

Navigation

If equipped, press SEL to enter theNavigation menu. Displays a map orturn by turn directions. If there is noactive route, press p to resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an active



route, press SEL to cancel routeguidance or turn the voice promptson/off.

Settings

Press SEL to enter the Settingsmenu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Settings menu.

Units: Press p while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose US or Metric units bypressing SEL while the desired itemis highlighted.

Display Theme: Press p to enterthe Display Theme menu. Selectfrom Link to Drive Mode, Track,Sport, or Tour for the cluster theme.

Speed Warning: The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press p when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Enable the speedwarning and then usew orx toadjust the value. Press SEL to setthe speed. Once the speed is set,

this feature can be turned off bypressing SEL while viewing thispage. If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed with a chime.

Pocket Gauges: Press p whilePocket Gauges is displayed to enterthe menu and select gauges thatcan be displayed for the Sporttheme on the left or right of thedisplay area. Choose from OilPressure Gauge, Oil TemperatureGauge, Battery Voltage,Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge, Horsepower, or a blankgauge.

Software Info: Press p whileSoftware Info is highlighted todisplay open source softwareinformation.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).



{ Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There is stilla little fuel left, but the fuel tankshould be filled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge indicated the tank washalf full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half thetank's capacity to fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.



. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Boost Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge indicates vacuum duringlight to moderate throttle and boostunder heavier throttle.

It displays the air pressure level inthe intake manifold before it entersthe engine's combustion chamber.

The gauge is automatically centeredat zero every time the engine isstarted. Actual vacuum or boost isdisplayed from this zero point.Changes in ambient pressure, suchas driving in mountains andchanging weather, will slightlychange the zero reading.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gauge pointer moves to thehigh end, the engine is too hot.

This reading indicates the samething as the warning light. It meansthat the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 10-27 for moreinformation.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seat

such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-15.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-42.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-20 forimportant safety information. Thepassenger airbag status indicator ison the instrument panel.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,

or the on or off symbol, to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

with the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-34.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed in

Service Only Mode, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9-19.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and diagnosisand service might be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.



{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systems

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

could lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. If fuel has been added to the

vehicle using the capless funneladapter, make sure the caplessfunnel adapter is removed. See“Filling the Tank with a PortableGas Can” under Filling the Tankon page 9-55. The diagnosticsystem can detect if the adapterhas been left installed in thevehicle, allowing fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.



A few driving trips with theadapter removed should turn offthe light.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Fuel on page 9-53.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel near the hood release. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe vehicle is placed in ServiceOnly Mode and the malfunction

indicator lamp does not comeon. See your dealer forassistance in verifying properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a base brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when theparking brake is applied. If the lightcontinues flashing after the parking

brake is released, or while driving,there is a problem with the ElectricParking Brake system or anothersystem. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Brake SystemMessages on page 5-34.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

The service electric parking brakelight should come on briefly whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it doesnot come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

If this light stays on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parking



brake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ElectricParking Brake on page 9-35. If amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5-34.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset the

system. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-21 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5-34.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.




StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.



{ Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating onpage 10-27.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-27.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-43. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-55.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-58.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.



This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-18.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.



Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-48.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info application. See InstrumentCluster on page 5-7. The Infoapplication is only available whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN. Thedisplays show the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are on the right steeringwheel control.



w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press o to openapplication menus on the left. Pressp to open interaction menus on theright.

SEL (Select): Press to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info displays.Depending on the vehicle, somemay not be available.

Current Speed: Displays thevehicle speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

Trip A or B/Average FuelEconomy/Average Speed: Tripdisplays the current distancetraveled, in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset. The trip odometer

can be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Average Fuel Economy displays theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The Average FuelEconomy can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this displayis active.

Average Speed displays theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Fuel Range/Instantaneous FuelEconomy: Fuel Range displays theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplays the current fuel economy ineither liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).This number reflects only theapproximate fuel economy that thevehicle has right now and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange.

This display may also show thenumber of cylinders the vehicle isrunning on. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-25.



Oil Life: Displays an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-37. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-12. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press and hold SEL for several

seconds while the Oil Life display isactive. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 10-18.

Tire Pressure: Displays theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10-57 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-58.

Best Average Fuel Economy:Displays the average fuel economy,the best fuel economy over theselected distance, and a bar graphshowing instantaneous fueleconomy. Press p to change theselected distance.

Fuel Used/Timer: Displays theapproximate liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel that have beenused since last reset. The fuel usedcan be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

This display can also be used as atimer. To start/stop the timer, pressp while this display is active andthen SEL to start/stop the timer. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To reset the timer to zero,press and hold SEL or use p toaccess the menu while this displayis active.

ECO Index: Aids the driver indetermining how efficiently they aredriving.

This display may also show thenumber of cylinders the vehicle isrunning on. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-25.

Speed Limit: Displays signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Engine Hours/Lifetime Revs:Displays the total number of hoursthe engine has run. It also showstotal engine revolutions divided by10,000.



Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright,or too high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projectedonto the windshield.

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.

{ Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe instrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45 and“Settings” under Instrument Clusteron page 5-7.

The HUD may display differentalerts and information for vehiclesequipped with these features:. Speedometer. Tachometer

. Manual Transmission Gear (IfEquipped)

. Manual Paddle Shift GearIndicator (If Equipped)

These displays on the HUD arefor use when using the manualpaddle shift controls to shift thetransmission. See “ManualPaddle Shift” in AutomaticTransmission on page 9-27.

. Shift Light

This light is used forperformance driving to indicatethat the vehicle's bestperformance level has beenreached to shift the transmissioninto the next higher gear. Anarrow pointing up will light up onthe display just prior to reachingthe engine fuel cut-off mode.

. G-Force Gauge

. Audio Information

. Upcoming Maneuver fromOnBoard Navigation



. Upcoming Maneuver fromOnStar

. Incoming Call

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel on the instrumentpanel.

To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Adjust the HUD settings asneeded.

$ (Image Adjustment): Pressdown or lift up to adjust the verticalposition of the HUD image in thewindshield.

! (Display View): Press toselect the display view. Each presswill cause the display view tochange to the next view. If vehiclemessages are displayed, pressingthe DIC select button may clear themessage. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26.

D (Image Brightness): Lift upand hold to brighten the display.Press down and hold to dim thedisplay. Hold down to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Display Views

There are several HUD views thatcan be displayed:

English

Metric

Tour: Displays the vehicle speed,gear position, shift indicator, anddriver mode.



English

Metric

Sport: Displays the vehicle speed,a circular tachometer, gear position,shift indicator, and G-Force meter.

English

Metric

Track: Displays the vehicle speed,a linear tachometer, gear position,shift lights, and G-Force meter.

English

Metric

Timing: Displays a lineartachometer, gear position, shiftlights, and performance or lap timer.The performance or lap timercontent displayed depends on whichfeature is currently in use in theinstrument cluster. See InstrumentCluster on page 5-7.



Interrupts

The interrupt information temporarilydisplays in any HUD view. Oncedisplayed, HUD returns to theprevious HUD view. Interrupts mayinclude:. Audio Information. Navigation Turn-by-Turn

Information. Incoming Call Information. Vehicle Alerts

English

Metric

Audio: May display when a newsource, radio station, or media typeis selected.

English

Metric

Navigation: Turn-by-turnnavigation information may bedisplayed when Navigation is activeand an upcoming maneuver ispending. It appears until themaneuver is complete and then theHUD display returns to theprevious view.



English

Metric

Phone: May display when anincoming call is received from eitherOnStar or a Bluetooth connectedphone. It appears momentarily untilthe call is answered or ignored.

English

Metric

Vehicle Alerts: Alerts can bedismissed in the instrument cluster.All alerts are not displayed inthe HUD.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:. Nothing is covering the

HUD lens.. HUD brightness setting is not

too dim or too bright.. HUD is adjusted to the proper

height.. Polarized sunglasses are

not worn.. Windshield and HUD lens are

clean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement on page 10-37.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SEL. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on the vehiclecontent.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10-33.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-32.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theElectric Parking Brake is on whilethe vehicle is in motion. See ElectricParking Brake on page 9-35.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.



SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the parkingbrake. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the ElectricParking Brake without the brakepedal applied. See Electric ParkingBrake on page 9-35.

Compass MessagesDashes may be displayed if thevehicle temporarily losescommunication with the GlobalPositioning System (GPS).

Convertible TopMessagesThe following messages are forvehicles with a powerconvertible top.

ATTACH TRUNK PARTITIONTO OPERATE TOP

This message displays and a soundwill be heard if the trunk partition isnot in place. Open the hatch/trunkand make sure the trunk partition issecure and no objects are on thetrunk partition.

BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW– TOP DISABLED

This message displays when thebattery voltage is too low to operatethe convertible top.

CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP

This message displays if the trunk isopen while you are trying to operatethe convertible top. Make sure thetrunk is closed before operating theconvertible top.

FOLDING TOP MOTIONCOMPLETE

This message displays when the topsuccessfully completes an open/close cycle.

FOLDING TOP NOT SECURECOMPLETE TOP MOTION

This message occurs if the top isnot secure. Several beeps willsound. Complete the power open orpower close cycle for the top. If it isnot possible to move the top to afully open or fully closed position,make sure that all objects are clearof the path of the top systemcomponents.

ONLY MANUAL OPERATIONOF TOP POSSIBLE

This message indicates that theposition of the top cannot be fullydetermined by the power convertibletop controls. Try moving the top inthe other direction. This messagewill also be displayed if a fault isdetected by the convertible topcontrols. See “Manual Movement ofTop” under Convertible Top onpage 2-27.



REDUCE VEHICLE SPEED TOOPERATE TOP

This message is displayed when thevehicle speed exceeds or isapproaching the convertible topspeed cut off.

TEMPERATURE TOO LOW –TOP DISABLED

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is pressedand it is too cold to operate thepower convertible top. Move thevehicle to a warmer location andwait for the vehicle temperature torise. This may take several hoursdepending on the initial vehicletemperature and the temperature ofthe new location.

TOP NOT SECURE

This message displays when thepower convertible top is notcompletely opened or closed. Pressand hold the convertible top buttonuntil the top is fully opened orclosed. This is indicated by the

FOLDING TOP MOTIONCOMPLETE message beingdisplayed and an audible indicator.

TOP POWERING DOWNCOMPLETE TOP MOTION

This message displays when thepower convertible top can no longerhold the top in an intermediateposition. Top system componentsmay move during this time based onexternal forces. Keep objects clearfrom the normal path of movementfor the top system components.

TOP SYSTEM OVERHEATED,PLEASE WAIT

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is pressedand the power convertible top pumpmotor temperature is overheated.Wait for the power convertible toppump motor to cool down beforeusing the power convertible top.

VALET SWITCH ACTIVE – TOPDISABLED

This message displays when ValetMode is active.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9-48.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will display onthe DIC showing which door isopen. If the vehicle has been shiftedout of P (Park), a DOOR OPENmessage will also be displayed.If the shift lever is in M (ManualMode), the DOOR OPEN messagewill display if the vehicle starts tomove. Close the door completely.



HOOD OPEN

This message will display along witha hood open symbol when the hoodis open. Close the hood completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the trunk is open.Close the trunk completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATING —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —TURN VEHICLE OFF

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-18, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26, EngineOil on page 10-12, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and this



message remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-12.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

UPSHIFT NOW, ENGINEPROTECTION ACTIVE

This message indicates the enginecontrols have taken action toprevent an oil starvation condition.This may reduce the availableengine power, or on automatictransmission equipped vehiclesforce an upshift to a higher gear.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.



NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKETO RESTART

This message displays if the RKEtransmitter is no longer detected inthe vehicle. Press the brake pedalto restart the vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays whenleaving the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter still inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitter needsto be replaced.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on or off. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-3.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Ride Control SystemMessages

COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the CompetitiveDriving mode is selected. Theinstrument cluster light will be onwhen the Competitive Driving modeis selected. Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. The Traction ControlSystem (TCS) will not be operating

while in the Competitive Drivingmode. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See CompetitiveDriving Mode on page 9-43,including the “Launch Control”information.

MAXIMUM SPEED 129 km/h(80MPH)

This message displays when amalfunction is present in theSelective Ride Control system. Thevehicle speed will be limited to avalue determined by the vehiclewhen the shock absorber systemhas failed and the shocks are intheir full soft mode. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe SEL button. The messagereappears every 10 minutes untilthis condition changes.



PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVEHANDLING ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument clusterlight will also be on when this modeis selected. Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. In this mode the TractionControl and StabiliTrak system areavailable but intended for use onwet race track conditions. Adjustyour driving accordingly. Thissystem is available only onZ06 models and models with FE4 –Z51 Performance Package andMagnetic Ride Control. See“Performance TractionManagement” and “Launch Control”under Competitive Driving Mode onpage 9-43 for more informationabout the use of this mode.

PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVEHANDLING ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument clusterlight will also be on when this modeis selected. Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. In this mode the TractionControl and StabiliTrak system areavailable but intended for use on dryrace track conditions. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. This system isavailable only on Z06 models andmodels with FE4. See “PerformanceTraction Management” and “LaunchControl” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9-43 for moreinformation about the use ofthis mode.

PERF TRAC 3 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument cluster

light will also be on when this modeis selected. Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. In this mode the TractionControl and StabiliTrak system areavailable but intended for use on dryrace track conditions. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. This system isavailable only on Z06 models andmodels with FE4. See “PerformanceTraction Management” and “LaunchControl” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9-43 for moreinformation about the use ofthis mode.

PERF TRAC 4 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING OFF

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument clusterlight will also be on when this modeis selected. Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. In this mode the TractionControl is available but intended foruse on dry race track conditions.



The StabiliTrak system is disabledwhen this mode is selected. Thismode will require more driver skillthan modes 1–3. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. This system is availableonly on Z06 models and modelswith FE4. See “PerformanceTraction Management” and “LaunchControl” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9-43 for moreinformation about the use ofthis mode.

PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVEHANDLING OFF

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument clusterlight will also be on when this modeis selected. Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. In this mode the TractionControl is available but intended foruse on dry race track conditions.The StabiliTrak system is disabledwhen this mode is selected. Thismode will require more driver skill

than modes 1–4. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. This system is availableonly on Z06 models and modelswith FE4. See “PerformanceTraction Management” and “LaunchControl” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9-43 for moreinformation about the use ofthis mode.

REAR AXLE OFF

If this message is displayed, theElectronic Limited-Slip Rear (ifequipped) is not operational. Drivewith caution. Avoid high speeds,aggressive driving, and sharpcornering. The system could beoverheated. Allow the system tocool. If this message remains on,see your dealer for service. Thevehicle is safe to drive, however,continue to drive with caution.

When this message is displayed,the vehicle’s handling capabilitieswill be reduced during severemaneuvers. StabiliTrak will be

affected. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-37.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak systemand the vehicle needs service. TheStabiliTrak system light on theinstrument cluster also turns on anda sound will be heard. See yourdealer. When this message isdisplayed, the system is notworking. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-37.

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM

If this message displays when youare driving, there is a problem withthe Traction Control System (TCS)and the vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer. When this message isdisplayed, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.



The TCS light on the instrumentcluster will also turn on and a soundwill be heard.

When this message is displayed,the computer controlled systems willnot assist the driver in controllingthe vehicle. Have the systemrepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-37.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe SEL button.

SHOCKS INOPERATIVE

This message displays when amalfunction is present in theSelective Ride Control system,which is causing the shocks to be intheir full soft mode. This is awarning to the driver that the vehiclehandling may be affected. Have thevehicle serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe SEL button. The messagereappears every 10 minutes untilthis condition changes.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

PROGRAM CLUSTER

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the instrumentcluster. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem and a chime may sound.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE REAR AXLE

If there is a problem detected withthe Electronic Limited-Slip RearAxle, this message displays. Whendisplayed, the system is notoperational and driving should beadjusted accordingly. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

When this message is displayed,the vehicle’s handling capabilitieswill be reduced during severemaneuvers. StabiliTrak will beaffected. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-37.



SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO STARTVEHICLE

This message is displayed whenattempting to start an automatictransmission equipped vehiclewithout first pressing the brakepedal.

PRESS CLUTCH TO START

This message is displayed whenattempting to start a manualtransmission equipped vehiclewithout first pressing the clutchpedal.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the pushbutton startsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-58.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-58.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-24.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10-46, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-55.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26.



Transmission Messages

1-4 SHIFT

This message displays on a manualtransmission vehicle when you canonly shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)instead of 1 (First) to 2 (Second).

PERFORMANCE SHIFTACTIVE

This message appears when thevehicle is in Sport or Track modeand either Performance AlgorithmShift/Performance Algorithm Liftfoottransmission modes have beenentered.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays whenattempting to shift to a gear notappropriate for the vehicle speedand engine revolutions perminute (rpm).

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe vehicle if the vehicle is not inP (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

If this message is displayed duringnormal vehicle operation on flatroads, the vehicle may needservice. See your dealer for aninspection.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control. SeeWindshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-2.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

This message is displayed when thevehicle speed is greater than thespeed warning speed. See "SpeedWarning" under Instrument Clusteron page 5-7.



SPEED LIMIT SET TO XXX

This message is displayed when thespeed warning is set. See "SpeedWarning" under Instrument Clusteron page 5-7.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. Fill thewindshield washer reservoir as soonas possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7 for the location of thewindshield washer reservoir. Also,see Washer Fluid on page 10-28.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to program each front windowfor the express-up feature to work.See Power Windows on page 2-22.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Infotainment System AudioSystem Controls

To access thepersonalization menu:

1. Press SETTINGS on the HomePage on the infotainment systemdisplay.

2. Press the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

3. Press to select the desiredfeature setting.

4. Press o BACK on the faceplateor press the Back screen buttonto return to the previous menu.



Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Time and Date. Driving Mode. Language (Language). Valet Mode. Teen Driver. Radio. Vehicle. Bluetooth. Voice. Display. Rear Camera. Return to Factory Settings. Software Information

Each menu is detailed in thefollowing information.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock on page 5-4.

Driving Mode

Select and the following maydisplay:. Engine Sound Management. Steering

Engine Sound Management

This allows the Engine SoundManagement feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Auto (Mode Selector) or Off.

Steering

This allows the Steering feature tobe turned on or off.

Select Auto (Mode Selector), Tour,Sport, or Track.

Language (Language)

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition will reflect the selectedlanguage.

Valet Mode (If Equipped)

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit top speed, power,and access to vehicle storagelocations (if equipped).

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Press Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Press Back to goback to the previous menu.

Teen Driver (If Equipped)

Press and the following maydisplay:. View Report Card. Manage Settings. Change PIN. Key Registration. Clear All Teen Keys/PIN



View Report Card

This allows the driver’s drivinghabits to be viewed. See “TeenDriver” in “Settings” in theinfotainment manual.

Manage Settings

Press and the following maydisplay:. Audio Volume Limit. Teen Driver Speed Limiter. Teen Driver Speed Warning

Audio Volume Limit

This allows a maximum radiovolume to be set.

Select Off or On.

Teen Driver Speed Limiter

If equipped, this allows themaximum speed limit of the vehicleto be set.

Select Off or On.

Teen Driver Speed Warning

This allows a warning to be setwhen a certain speed is exceeded.

Select Off or On.

Change PIN

This allows the PersonalIdentification Number (PIN) to bechanged. See “Teen Driver” in“Settings” in the infotainmentmanual.

Key Registration

This allows the key to be registered.See “Register or Unregister a Key”in “Teen Driver” in the infotainmentmanual.

Clear All Teen Keys/PIN

This allows all Teen Driver keys andPIN to be cleared.

Select Continue or Cancel.

Radio

Press and the following maydisplay:. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Bose Audio Pilot

. Maximum Start Up Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.



Bose Audio Pilot

This feature adjusts the volumebased on the noise in the vehicle.See “Bose AudioPilot NoiseCompensation Technology” under“Infotainment System Settings” inthe infotainment manual.

Select Off or On.

Maximum Start Up Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level.

To set the maximum startup volume,press + or − to increase ordecrease.

Vehicle

Select and the following maydisplay:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality

Select and the following maydisplay:. Auto Fan Max Speed. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Max Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the front defog willautomatically react to temperatureand humidity conditions that maycause fogging.

Select Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rear defog.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience

Select and the following maydisplay:. Auto Memory Recall. Easy Exit Options. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored1 or 2 button positions whenentering the vehicle. See MemorySeats on page 3-4.

Select Off or On. On some vehiclesselect Off, On - Driver Door Open,or On - At Ignition On.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously storedExit button position when exiting thevehicle. See Memory Seats onpage 3-4.

Select Off or On.



Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press + or − to adjust the volume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Lighting

Select and the following maydisplay:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps when K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed to locate the vehicle.

Select Off or On.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60Seconds, or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select and the following maydisplay:. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Select Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park)with an automatic transmission orwhen the vehicle is turned off with amanual transmission.

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select and the following maydisplay:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Passive Door Unlock



. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the ventilated seatson when using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This feature can be turned on or off,or can be used to select feedbackwhen using the button on the driverdoor to lock the vehicle. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth

Select and the following maydisplay:. Pair New Device. Device Management. Ringtones. Voice Mail Numbers

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.



Ringtones

Press to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT or press the EDITbutton. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE or press the SAVEbutton.

Voice

Select and the following maydisplay:. Confidence Threshold. Prompt Length. Audio Feedback Speed

Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustmentof the sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Confirm More orConfirm Less.

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display

Select and the following maydisplay:. Mode. Calibrate Touchscreen. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display screenfor day or night driving.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Pressanywhere on the display area or anyfaceplate button to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera

Select and the following maydisplay:. Guidance Lines

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. See“Guidance Lines” in Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9-51.

Return to Factory Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Restore Vehicle Settings. Clear All Private Data. Restore Radio Settings



Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

The FCC Grant of EquipmentAuthorization Certificate number isNZLSAHL5B.

The Canadian Registration IDnumber is 4112A-SAHL5B.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in thedriver sun visor.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.



See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight changes from a slow to arapid flash. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under in“Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators” later inthis section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid light



and the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds and then

release it. If the garage doordoes not move or the lamp onthe garage door opener receiverdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process to program thetwo remaining buttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming helpcall 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long

enough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.



Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

There are four positions:

O (Off/On): Briefly turn to thisposition to turn the automatic lightcontrol off or on again. Whenreleased, the control returns to theAUTO position.

AUTO (Automatic): Sets theexterior lamps to automatic mode.AUTO mode turns the exteriorlamps on and off depending on howmuch light is available outside thevehicle.


6-2 Lighting

To override AUTO mode, turn thecontrol to O.To reset to AUTO mode, turn thecontrol to O and then release backto AUTO. Automatic mode alsoresets when the vehicle is turned offand then back on again if the controlis left in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

The parking lamp indicator lightcomes on and stays on when theparking lamps are on with theengine off and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime will sound if theexterior lamp control is left on ineither the headlamp or parking lampposition and the driver door isopened with the ignition off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal lever awayfrom you and release to turn thehigh beams on. To return to lowbeams, push the lever again or pullit toward you and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo use the flash-to-pass feature,briefly pull the turn signal levertoward you. The high-beamindicator flashes to indicate to theother driver that you intend to pass.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thededicated lamps come on when thefollowing conditions are met:. It is still daylight and the ignition

is on.. The exterior lamp control is in

the AUTO position.. The transmission is not in

P (Park) or the parking brakeis off.


Lighting 6-3

When DRL are on, only the frontlamps will be on. The parkinglamps, taillamps, instrument panellights, or other exterior lamps willnot be on when the DRL arebeing used.

When it is dark enough outside, thefront lamps dim to parking lampsand the normal low-beamheadlamps turn on.

When it is bright enough outside,the regular lamps go off, and thefront DRL will take over. If thevehicle is started in a dark garage,the automatic headlamp systemcomes on immediately. Once thevehicle leaves the garage, it takesapproximately one minute for theautomatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrumentcluster may not be as bright asusual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness knob is in the fullbright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6-5.

If it is dark enough outside and theexterior lamp control is off, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagemay display. See Lamp Messageson page 5-39.

Turning the exterior lamp control tooff a second time, or turning on theheadlamps will remove the DICmessage. If the parking lamps wereturned on instead, the DIC messagewill continue to be displayed.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position orshift into P (Park). The DRL will stayoff until the control is toggled againor the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

This procedure applies only tovehicles first sold in the UnitedStates.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps and parkinglamps come on automatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps and parking lamps whendriving through a parking garage ortunnel.


6-4 Lighting

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDRL. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-5.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps and parking lampswill turn off or may change toDaytime Running Lamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

To turn automatic headlamp systemback on, turn the band to O again,then release it.

If the automatic headlamp systemhas the headlamps turned on andyou turn the ignition off, theheadlamps will turn off. When thedriver door is opened theheadlamps and parking lamps willilluminate for a period of time.

The length of the delayedillumination period can be changed.See “Exit Lighting” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-45.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon and the exterior lamp control is inAUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lamps willcome on. The time it takes for thelamps to turn on depends on thewiper speed. When the wipers areturned off, the lamps turn off. Todisable, move the exterior lampcontrol to O or;.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flashers warnothers that you have a problem. Thebutton is near the center of theinstrument panel.

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers workno matter what mode the ignition isin, even if the ignition is turned off.


Lighting 6-5

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, the

turn signal flashes three times.If more flashes are desired,continue to hold the lever.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a turn signalindicator light failure may haveoccurred.

If a turn signal has failed, the lampmay need to be replaced. See yourdealer.

Turn Signal on Chime

A chime sounds if the turn signalhas been on for more than 1.2 km(0.75 mi) of driving.

If you need to leave the turn signalon for more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi),turn off the signal and then turn itback on.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The knob for this feature is on theleft side of the instrument panel.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights at night.Turn the knob completely clockwiseto turn on the interior lights.

Courtesy LampsWhen any door or the hatch/trunk isopened, the interior lamps will comeon, unless it is bright outside.


6-6 Lighting

The rear compartment lights onlycome on when the rearcompartment is opened.

To adjust the brightness of thecourtesy lamps, turn the instrumentpanel brightness knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are in theoverhead console. The lamps go onwhen a door is opened. When thedoors are closed, press the lampbuttons to turn on each lamp.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, back-up lamps, licenseplate lamps, outside mirror lamps,dome lamp, and most of the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When thedriver door is opened, all controllights, Driver Information Center(DIC) lights, and door pocket lightsturn on. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off, and then thedome and remaining interior lampsdim to off. Entry lighting can bedisabled manually by changing theignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing Q on the RKEtransmitter.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, back-uplamps, parking lamps, outside mirrorlamps, and license plate lampscome on at night, or in areas withlimited lighting, when the driver dooris opened after the ignition is turnedoff. The dome lamp comes on afterthe ignition is changed to the OFFposition. The exterior lamps anddome lamp remain on after the dooris closed for a set amount of time,then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45.

Battery Power ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to helpprevent the battery from beingdrained in case any of the followinglamps are left on: vanity mirrorlamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps,


Lighting 6-7

or glove box lamps. If any of theselamps are left on, they willautomatically time-out after about10 minutes. To reset it, the ignitionmust be turned on.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverIf the exterior lamps are left on, theyturn off when the ignition is turnedoff. If the parking lamps are turnedon while the ignition is off, theparking lamps remain on until theyare manually turned off.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Performance DataRecorder (PDR)Performance DataRecorder (PDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Performance DataRecorder (PDR)If equipped, the PDR icon displayson the Home screen.

The PDR records video, audio, andvehicle data. This data is stored ona removable SD card in theglove box.

The recorded data is not storedanywhere else and is onlyaccessible from the SD card.

To begin, insert a FAT32 formattedSD card, Class 10 preferred, intothe glove box SD card reader.


7-2 Infotainment System

Press the PDR icon to access thePDR menu. The optionsdisplayed are:

Start Recording

If the system is unable to beginrecording, the Start Recordingbutton is grayed out.

Press the Start Recording button tobegin recording. After recordingbegins, this button changes to StopRecording. Press to stop therecording session.

The elapsed time will show whenrecording. To define a finish line,see “Define Finish Line” later in thissection.

If there is no available space on theSD card, a message displays.Delete or transfer recordings on theSD card or use another SD cardwith free space.

To delete a recording, go to theRecorded Sessions menu and pressz next to the item. See “RecordedSessions” later in this section.

If no SD card is inserted, a messagedisplays.

If a system error occurs, a messagedisplays. See your dealer.



Define Finish Line

To track and record the vehicle’s laptimes, the starting point of a lapmust be set. Crossing this pointactivates the lap timer whenrecording.

To set the finish line, position thevehicle with the front bumper at thestart/finish point. From the PDRmenu, press Define Finish Line andthen press Mark Finish Line. Thiscan be done with the vehiclemoving.

Recorded Sessions

To view recorded videos, pressRecorded Sessions.

A list of recordings displays.

Select the recording to startplayback.

Press z next to an item to deletethat recording, Press Yes to deleteor No to cancel on the confirmationscreen. Press Dismiss to exit.

Video playback is not allowed whilethe vehicle is in motion.

Tap on the screen while the video isplaying to display the video controls:

Video Scrubber: Changes theposition and playback. The length ofthe bar corresponds to the time ofthe video. Advance or rewind thevideo by dragging along the bar.

Delete Recording: Press to deletethe video. A confirmation screendisplays. Press Yes to delete or Noto cancel.

Pause/Play: Press to play orpause the video. The button willchange when pressed.

Back: Press to display the previousscreen.

Exit: Press to exit the currentdisplay.



Choose Video Overlay

Press the Choose Video Overlayscreen button to display the menuscreen.

Select one:. No Overlay. Sport. Track. Performance Timing

No Overlay:

No vehicle data displays on top ofthe recorded video. Vehicle data isstill available with the video whenaccessed in the toolbox software.

Sport:

Displays these vehicle metrics:. Vehicle Speed: Up to three digits

are displayed in km/h or MPHdepending on vehicle settings.

. Engine Rotations Per Minute(RPMs): The vertical line andtriangle show current RPMs. Asthe RPMs increase, the greenbackfill follows.

. Transmission State (CurrentGear): Automatic transmissionsdisplay PRDN. D can change toD1, D2, etc. When an automatictransmission is in manual shift

mode, the display will change toM1, M2, etc. Manualtransmissions display 1, 2, etc.

. Lateral G-Force Graphic: Leftand Right G-Forces aredisplayed. The graphic fills to theleft or the right depending on themeasure value. The measuredG-Force displays as a number atthe top of the graphic.

Track:

Displays these vehicle metrics:. Vehicle Speed: Same as Sport.. GPS Tracking Map: Shows the

vehicle’s current position relativeto a known route.



. Engine Rotations Per Minute(RPMs): The vertical line andtriangle indicate current RPMs.As the RPMs increase, theorange backfill follows.

. Transmission State (CurrentGear): Same as Sport.

. Friction Bubble Graphic: Lateraland longitudinal G-Forces aredisplayed as a dot within abubble. A red dot displays whenthe vehicle starts braking andturns green when the vehicleaccelerates. The dot is whitewhen the vehicle is not moving.A white dot is the default.

. Brake and Throttle Graphic:Displays the percentage value ofbrake and throttle pedal positionfrom 0–100%.

. Steering Angle: The graphic fillsfrom the center to the left or rightdepending on the direction ofsteering. The numerical steeringangle displays below thegraphic.

. Active Handling Active Indicator:The graphic only displays if theactive handling systems areactivated.

. Performance TractionManagement (PTM) Mode:Displays the current PTM mode.The options are Wet, Dry, Sport1, Sport 2, or Race.

. Current Lap Time: Displays theelapsed lap time if the finish lineis defined and the vehicle hascrossed the defined finish line atleast once.

Performance Timing:

Displays these vehicle metrics:. Vehicle Speed: Same as Sport.

. Engine Rotations Per Minute(RPMs): Same as Sport.

. Transmission State (CurrentGear): Same as Sport.

. 0–100 km/h (0–60 mph), 0–200 km/h (0–100 mph), 400 m(1/4 th mi), and 0–200–0 km/h(0–100–0 mph): The timer startsrecording as soon as the vehicleaccelerates. As the vehiclepasses each speed and distancemilestone, it is displayed on theoverlay.

. Throttle Position: Displaysthe percentage of throttle appliedfrom 0–100%.

. Active Handling Active Indicator:The graphic only displays if theactive handling systems areactivated.

Naming Convention

The recorded video file name isstored as the recorded date and thelength of the recording.



If the recorded session wasrecorded while the system was inValet or Teen Mode, the file namewill display the mode, date, andlength of time.

Settings

Press the Settings button from thePDR menu to display settings.

Valet Mode Recording: Allowsrecording preferences to beselected. It is recommended that ablank SD card be used. Availablechoices are:. Automatically record when in

Valet Mode: Enables the PDR tobegin recording as soon as thevehicle is in Valet Mode.

. Overwrite existing data whenmemory full: Allows manualoverwriting of previousrecordings, one at a time startingwith the oldest, when the currentrecording requires additionalstorage to continue.

Teen Mode Recording: Allows thesetting of recording preferences.It is recommended that a blank SDcard be used. Available choices are:. Automatically record when in

Teen Mode: Enables the PDR tobegin recording as soon as thevehicle is in Teen Mode.

. Overwrite existing data whenmemory full: Allows manualoverwriting of previousrecordings, one at a time startingwith the oldest, when the currentrecording requires additionalstorage to continue.

Software Information: DisplaysPDR software information andversion numbers.

Toolbox Software: Allows for theevaluation of driver and vehicleperformance during a recordedevent. See www.Corvette.com todownload the software.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. A/C (Air Conditioning)

4. Air Delivery Modes

5. Defrost

6. SYNC

7. Fan Control

8. Driver and RedundantPassenger Heated andVentilated Front Seat Controls

9. Recirculation

10. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Passenger Temperature Control

The passenger temperature controlis below the passenger sideair vent.

On/Off System Operation

Press AUTO to turn the system on.Turn the fan control knob completelycounterclockwise to turn the fan off.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode orfan setting is manually adjusted orthe A/C is turned off, the AUTOindicator turns off and displays willshow the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

The system operates to reach theset temperature as quickly aspossible. The AUTO control systemworks best with the windows up andthe removable roof installed or theconvertible top up.

Manual Operation

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver temperaturesetting. Pressw orx to increaseor decrease the passengertemperature setting.

SYNC: Press to link all climatezone settings to the driver settings.The SYNC indicator light will turnon. When the passengertemperature setting is adjusted, theSYNC indicator light turns off.

Fan Control: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Turn the knob completelycounterclockwise to turn the fan off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes: PressY,\,[ , or- to change the direction ofthe airflow. An indicator light comeson in the selected mode button.



Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets to clearthe windows of fog or moisture. Therecirculation mode cannot beselected while in the defog mode.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.The recirculation mode cannot beselected while in defrost mode.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off the airconditioner will not run and theindicator light may turn off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air asneeded to defog the windshieldfaster.

A slight change in engineperformance may be noticed whenthe air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This isnormal. The system is designed tomake adjustments to help with fueleconomy while still maintaining theselected temperature.

If the A/C is turned off, automaticoperation is cancelled.

/ (Recirculation): Press toturn on recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor reduce the entry of outside airand odors. Recirculation mode isnot available in defrost ordefog mode.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-45. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when the



interior temperature is cold and theoutside temperature is about 4°C(40°F) and below. The auto reardefogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2-20.

If equipped with a power convertibletop, the rear window defogger andheated mirrors are automaticallydisabled when the power convertibletop is moving or down.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

z / { (Driver and PassengerHeated and Ventilated Seats, IfEquipped): Press to heat orventilate the seat. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats on page 3-7.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation (If Equipped): If remotestart is used to start the vehicle, theclimate control system will come on.The system uses the driver’sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. The rearwindow defogger or heated outsiderearview mirrors, if equipped, maycome on based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight may not come on during aremote start. The heated orventilated seats may turn on if it iscold or hot outside. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-9andHeated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3-7 (if equipped).

Sensors

The interior cabin air temperatureand solar sensor on top of theinstrument panel near the

windshield monitors the solar heatand measures the initial interiorcabin temperature.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

The humidity and windshieldtemperature sensor is on thewindshield glass inside surface nearthe rearview mirror. The automaticclimate control system uses thissensor to receive information todetermine the need for defogging.

If any of these sensors are blockedor covered, the automatic climatecontrol system may not workproperly.

There is also a sensor behind thefront bumper. This sensor reads theoutside air temperature and helps tomaintain the temperature inside thevehicle. Any cover on the front ofthe vehicle could give a falsereading in the temperature.



Air VentsUse the tab on the air outlets tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the area around the baseof the instrument panel consoleand air path under the seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe passenger compartment airfilter reduces dust, pollen, and otherairborne irritants from outside airthat is pulled into the vehicle.Reductions in airflow, which mayoccur more often in dusty areas,indicate that the filter may need tobe replaced. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

{ Caution

Driving without a passengercompartment air filter in place cancause water and small particles,like paper and leaves, to bepulled into your climate controlsystem which may cause damageto it. Make sure you alwaysreplace the old filter with anew one.

The passenger compartment airfilter is on the passenger side of theengine compartment near thecoolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7.

To check or replace the air filter:

1. Release the retainer clips fromthe passenger compartment airfilter cover. The PVC hoses mayneed to be held out of the waybriefly to access the air filtercover.

2. Remove the cover.



3. Remove the filter and install thenew air filter.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Attach the retainer clips.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Track Events and CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-10Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-18Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Carbon Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-25

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-27Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-31Active Rev Match . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-35Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-37

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . 9-39Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-43Limited-Slip Differential(Except Z51 and Z06) . . . . . . 9-47

Limited-Slip Differential(Z51 and Z06 Only) . . . . . . . . 9-47

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Driver Assistance SystemsRear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-54Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56


9-2 Driving and Operating

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment manual formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.



Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Service VehicleMessages on page 5-42. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.



. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other

material on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Track Events andCompetitive DrivingParticipating in track events or othercompetitive driving without followingthe instructions provided may affectthe vehicle warranty. See thewarranty manual before using thevehicle for racing or othercompetitive driving.

Refer to Competitive Driving Modeon page 9-43.

Be sure to follow all serviceprocedures before driving thevehicle at track events orcompetitively.

Engine Oil

{ Caution

If the vehicle is used for trackevents and competitive driving,the engine may use more oil thanit would with normal use. Low oillevels can damage the engine.Check the oil level often andmaintain the proper level. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-12.

{ Caution

Not changing the engine oil to15W-50 may cause enginedamage. Engine oil must bechanged to 15W-50 synthetic.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2.



Z51 and Z06 Only: Check the oillevel often during track events andcompetitive driving and keep thelevel at or near 0.5 L (0.5 qt) abovethe upper mark that shows theproper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. After thecompetitive driving, remove excessoil so that the level on the dipstick isnot above the upper mark thatshows the proper operating range.

Except Z51 and Z06: Additional oilfill above the upper mark on thedipstick is not recommended fortrack events or other competitivedriving. Check the oil level oftenduring racing or other competitivedriving and keep the level at or nearthe upper mark that shows theproper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. After thecompetitive driving, remove excessoil so that the level on the dipstick isnot above the upper mark thatshows the proper operating range.

Brake Fluid

Replace existing brake fluid with aqualified high performance brakefluid from a sealed container. Brakefluid with a dry boiling point >279°C(534°F) is qualified. If highperformance brake fluid is used,replace it with GM approved brakefluid before driving on public roads.If high performance brake fluid is inthe vehicle and the age of the brakefluid is over a month old orunknown, replace the brake fluidbefore track events and competitivedriving. Do not use silicone orDOT-5 brake fluids.

Load Limit

Z51 Only: Limit vehicle load to thedriver only, with no other cargo.Inflate tires to 180 kPa (26 psi) anddrive at a maximum speed of280 km/h (174 mph).

Z06 Only: Limit vehicle load to thedriver only, with no other cargo.Inflate tires to 180 kPa (26 psi) anddrive at a maximum speed of296 km/h (184 mph).

Wheel Alignment

{ Caution

Using these wheel alignmentsettings may cause excessive tirewear. Only use these wheelalignment settings for racing orcompetitive driving. Excessive tirewear is not covered under thevehicle warranty.

If the vehicle is equipped with theZ51 package or is a Z06, the racingand competitive driving wheelalignment settings should be set asfollows:

Alignment should only be done byadjusting the lower control arm cambolts and by removing a maximumof one washer between the uppercontrol arms and frame.

Alignment values are targets, seeyour dealer for tolerances.

Front (per corner). Caster: +7.0 degrees



. Camber: -2.0 degrees

. Toe: 0.05 degrees toe in

Rear (per corner). Caster: 0 degrees. Camber: -2.0 degrees. Toe: 0.05 degrees toe in

Thrust Angle: 0 degrees

Rear Axle Fluid

{ Caution

During a first time track or racingevent, high rear axletemperatures can occur. Damagecould be caused to the rear axleand would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not drive aslong or as fast the first time thevehicle is driven on the track orraced.

The rear axle fluid temperaturesmay be higher than when driving insevere conditions. Drain and refillwith new fluid after the first racing or

competitive driving event, and thenafter every 24 hours of racing orcompetitive driving. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

General Information

If reduced performance isexperienced during track events orcompetitive driving, turning off theA/C will help to improve engineperformance.

Maintain a mixture of 40%DEX-COOL coolant and 60% clean,drinkable water to optimize engineperformance.

The front license plate bracket oraero panel should be removed fortrack events and competitive drivingto improve engine performance.

Rotor Cooling Ring

The following installation procedureis for Z51, and only if the vehicle isequipped with front dual cast brakerotors along with the supplied brakecooling ring kit. See your dealer forinformation.

If the vehicle is a Z51 and equippedwith a one piece brake rotor acooling ring is not required.

{ Caution

Do not leave rotor cooling ringsinstalled after a track event, asthis can cause corrosion withlong-term use. Rotor cooling ringsare for track use only. Trackdriving without the rotor coolingrings may result in brakepedal fade.

Installation:

1. Remove the front wheels.

2. Cut three 150 mm (6 in) lengthsof safety wire specified to T304Stainless Steel, 0.041 in nominaldiameter, not included.

3. Form each into a U shape with a20 mm (0.75 in) flat area in thecenter of the wire.



4. Place the rotor ring in the gapbetween the rotor brake plateand rotor hat, with the holes oneach side of the rotor spoke onthe outboard side of the rotor.

5. Place the U-shaped wire throughthe holes in the rotorcooling ring.

6. Bring the ends of the wire tightaround the corresponding rotorspoke.

7. Twist the safety wire into six toeight twists per 2.54 cm (1 in).

8. Bend the twisted wire so it isflush with the inside of the rotorring to prevent contact with thecaliper or brake hoses.

9. Verify that the rotor rings andsafety wire do not contact anyother components.

10. Reinstall the wheel using thespecific wheel nut torque. SeeCapacities and Specificationson page 12-2.

If additional brake cooling isrequired, the grille mesh in the lowercorners of the front grille in front ofthe brake duct can be removed.This is not reversible, and areplacement grille will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.If this is done, it is recommendedthat the gap between the fascia andthe cooling duct be taped over.

Brake Burnishing

New brake pads must be burnishedbefore racing or other competitivedriving.

{ Caution

Performing the brake burnishprocedure on a base brakesystem can result in brakedamage.

{ Caution

The new vehicle break-in periodshould be completed beforeperforming the brake burnishprocedure, otherwise damagemay occur to the powertrain/engine. See New VehicleBreak-In on page 9-18.

{ Caution

Brake pedal fade will occur duringany track burnish procedure andcan cause brake pedal travel and

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

force to increase. This couldextend stopping distance until thebrakes are fully burnished.

When this procedure is performedas instructed, it will not damage thebrakes. The brake pads will smokeand produce an odor. The brakingforce and pedal travel may increase.After the procedure, the brake padsmay appear white at the rotorcontact.

Perform this procedure only on drypavement, in a safe manner, and incompliance with all local and stateordinances/laws regarding motorvehicle operation.

Brake Burnish Procedure (Z51 andZ06 without Z07 PerformancePackage)

1. Apply the brakes 25 timesstarting at 100 km/h (60 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph) whiledecelerating at 0.4 g. This is a

medium brake application. Drivefor at least 1 km (0.6 mi)between applying the brakes.This first step may be skipped ifthere are more than 320 km(200 mi) on the brake pads.

2. Repeatedly apply the brakesfrom 100 km/h (60 mph) to25 km/h (15 mph) whiledecelerating at 0.8 g. This is ahard brake application, withoutactivating the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS). Drive for at least1 km (0.6 mi) between stops.Repeat until the brake pedaltravel starts to increase.Depending on conditions, thisshould take no longer than 25brake applications.

3. Cool down: Drive at 100 km/h(60 mph) for approximately15 km (10 mi) without using thebrakes.

4. Apply the brakes 25 times from100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph) while decelerating at0.4 g. This is a medium brake

application. Drive for at least1 km (0.6 mi) betweenapplications.

Street High Performance BrakeBurnishing Procedure (Z06 withZ07 Performance Package)

1. From a stop, accelerate asrapidly as possible withoutactivating traction control to aspeed of 100 km/h (60 mph).

2. Use enough pedal force tocompletely stop the vehicle infour to five seconds. If ABSactivates, braking is too hard.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 – 50times. This should take about10 minutes.

4. After completing the 50 stops,cool the brakes by driving for km(5 mi) at 100 km/h (60 mph)

As with all high performance brakesystems, some amount of brakesqueal is normal.



Racing/Track Brake BurnishingProcedure (Z06 with Z07Performance Package)

This procedure should only be runon a track and only on drypavement.

{ Caution

Brake pedal fade will occur duringthis track burnish procedure andcan cause brake pedal travel andforce to increase. This couldextend stopping distance until thebrakes are fully burnished.

1. Drive a normal first lap, not tooaggressively.

2. Laps 2 and 3 should begradually driven faster and moreaggressively, while allowing forreduced brake output andincreased stopping distance dueto brake fade.

3. Drive Lap 4 near full speed,while allowing for reduced brakeoutput and increased stoppingdistance due to brake fade.

4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cooldown laps.

5. Lap 7 should be normal drivingor an easy out lap.

Z07 Performance Package

The Z07 Performance Package hasan installed Stage 2 Aero Package,which consists of a front splitter withshort end caps, rocker panelextensions, and a rear spoiler.

Stage 3 Aero components aredelivered but not installed on thevehicle. These are intended to beinstalled for track use only. Thecomponents include:. Front splitter tall end caps that

replace the front splitter shortend caps.

. A center transparent wicker billfor the rear spoiler.

{ Warning

Changing the following tracksettings could reduce tire tractionand could cause a crash. Do notchange the track settings

The track settings for the Z07Performance Package with theStage 3 Aero Package are:. The front splitter tall end caps

installed.. The center transparent wicker

bill installed all the way up onthe rear spoiler.

. The Driver Mode Selector inTrack Mode.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these types



of driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-46.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.



{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-37.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, but

apply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-34.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.



. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems.”

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-26.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-37.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. The

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not get

the vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-82.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Withthe driver door open, you willfind the label attached below thedoor latch. This label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10-46 and Tire Pressureon page 10-55.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification label. It tells you theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification Label” later in thissection.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)



5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 181 kg (400 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg(150 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 113 kg(250 lbs)

Example 2



3. Available Cargo Weight =45 kg (100 lbs)



Example 3



3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the rearedge of the driver door. It tellsyou the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo. Never exceed the

GVWR for your vehicle, or theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle.

Do not load your vehicle withmore weight than it wasdesigned to carry. See “Stepsfor Determining Correct LoadLimit” earlier in this section.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



{ Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages or anything else —they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Put things in the rear areaof your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InFollow these recommendedguidelines during the first 2 414 km(1,500 mi) of driving this vehicle.Parts have a break-in period andperformance will be better in thelong run.

For the first 322 km (200 mi):. To break in new tires, drive at

moderate speeds and avoid hardcornering for the first 322 km(200 mi).

. New brake linings also need abreak- in period. Avoid makinghard stops during the first322 km (200mi). This isrecommended every time brakelinings are replaced.

For the first 800 km (500 mi):. Avoid full throttle starts and

abrupt stops.



. Do not exceed 4000 rpm.

. Avoid driving at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,including the use of cruisecontrol.

. Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle when theengine speed will exceed4000 rpm.

. Do not let the engine labor.Never lug the engine. With amanual transmission, shift to thenext lower gear. This ruleapplies at all times, not justduring the break-in period.

For the first 2 414 km (1,500 mi):. Do not participate in track

events, sport driving schools,or similar activities during thefirst 2 414 km (1,500mi).

. Check engine oil with everyrefueling and add if necessary.Oil and fuel consumption may behigher than normal during thefirst 2 414 km (1,500mi).

Front Air DamIf equipped, the front air dam hasminimal ground clearance.

Under normal operation, thecomponents will occasionallycontact some road surfaces (speedbumps, driveway ramps, etc.). Thiscan be heard inside the vehicle as ascraping noise. This is normal anddoes not indicate a problem.

Use care when approaching bumpsor objects on road surfaces andavoid them when possible.

Carbon FiberThis vehicle may be equipped withcarbon fiber parts. Dealer-installedaccessories may also containcarbon fiber. Some vehicles have acarbon fiber splitter and rockerextension. Do not stand on therocker extension or use it as a step,as it could break.

{ Warning

The exposed edges of carbonfiber parts can be sharp whendamaged. You or others could beinjured. Use caution whenwashing the vehicle, coming incontact with damaged carbonfiber parts, or removing theseparts. See your dealer forreplacement.

Ignition Positions



The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interferenceto the Keyless Access system. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-23.

Automatic Transmission

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display amessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See TransmissionMessages on page 5-44. When thevehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition system will switch to OFF.

Manual Transmission

If the vehicle is stationary, theignition will turn OFF, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-23.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.



{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice withinfive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This mode allowsthe use of some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9-21. The ignition will thenremain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.

The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral) for an automatictransmission. For a manualtransmission the vehicle can bestarted in Neutral or any other gearas long as the clutch pedal is fullypressed. To restart a vehicle with amanual transmission when it isalready moving, use the Neutralposition only. To restart a vehiclewith an automatic transmissionwhen it is already moving, useN (Neutral).



{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-57.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

The RKE transmitter must be insidethe vehicle for the ignition to work.

Cell phone chargers can interferewith the operation of the KeylessAccess system. Battery chargersshould not be plugged in whenstarting or turning off the engine.

To start the vehicle:

1. For vehicles with an automatictransmission, press the brakepedal, then press the ENGINESTART/STOP button on theinstrument panel. For vehicleswith a manual transmission,press the clutch pedal first, thenpress the ENGINE START/STOP button.

If there is no RKE transmitter inthe vehicle or if there issomething causing interferencewith it, the DIC will display amessage. See Key and LockMessages on page 5-38.

2. When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button andthe engine cranks automaticallyuntil it starts. If the battery in theRKE transmitter is weak, theDIC will display a message. Thevehicle can still be driven.

See “Starting the Vehicle with aLow Transmitter Battery” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

If the remote transmitter batteryis dead, insert it into the steeringcolumn transmitter pocket toenable engine starting. See “NOREMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE” underKey and Lock Messages onpage 5-38.

3. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

4. If the engine does not start andno DIC message is displayed,wait 15 seconds before tryingagain to let the cranking motorcool down.

If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the way



to the floor while cranking for upto 15 seconds maximum. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

Stopping the Engine

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, move the shift lever toP (Park) and press and hold the

ENGINE START/STOP button onthe instrument panel, until theengine shuts off. If the shift lever isnot in P (Park), the engine shuts offand the vehicle goes into theaccessory mode. The DIC displaysSHIFT TO PARK. Once the shiftlever is moved to P (Park), thevehicle turns off. If the vehicle has amanual transmission, move the shiftlever to R (Reverse) and set theparking brake after turning off theengine by pressing and holding theENGINE START/STOP button.

If the RKE transmitter is notdetected inside the vehicle when itis turned to off, the DIC displays amessage.

See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5-38.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows

These features continue to work upto 10 minutes after the engine isturned off or until either door isopened. If a door is opened, thepower windows and audio systemwill shut off.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on thelever and pushing the lever allthe way toward the front of thevehicle.



3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn theengine off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

move the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-23.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal. See ifyou can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pushingthe button on the lever. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficult

to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, see“Shifting Into P (Park)” previously inthis section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the transmissionparking pawl, so you can pull theshift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkShift lock release prevents shiftingout of P (Park) unless the vehicle isrunning or in accessory mode andthe brake pedal is applied.



The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery. See Jump Startingon page 10-79.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Release the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton, and let go of theshift knob.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking (ManualTransmission)Before exiting the vehicle, move theshift lever into 1 (First) orR (Reverse), and apply the parkingbrake. Once the shift lever has beenplaced into 1 (First) or R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition off and release theclutch.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

This system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions. With a manualtransmission, the system is onlyactive in Eco mode. With anautomatic transmission, the systemis available in all modes, but is moreaggressive in Eco mode. See DriverMode Control on page 9-39.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-23and Engine Exhaust on page 9-26.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, see Parking (ManualTransmission) on page 9-25.



AutomaticTransmission

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-23.

Be sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. Fully apply the brakes andthen press the shift lever buttonbefore shifting from P (Park) whenthe vehicle is running. If the vehicle

cannot be shifted out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever andpush the shift lever all the way intoP (Park) as brake application ismaintained. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting outof Park on page 9-24.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-13.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. If the vehicle needstowing, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-82.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed may

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, push the pedaldown to achieve the desired level ofacceleration.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9-4.

The transmission can be shifted likea manual transmission using thepaddle shift controls while inD (Drive). See Manual Mode onpage 9-28.

M (Manual Mode): InM (Manual Mode), the transmissioncan be shifted like a manual

transmission using the paddle shiftcontrols. See Manual Mode onpage 9-28.

Manual Mode

Manual Paddle Shift

When the shift lever is moved toM (Manual Mode), the transmissionenters Manual Mode. Thetransmission will hold the currentgear until a change is requested.The paddles on the steering wheelcan be used to manually upshift or



downshift the transmission. Theright (+) plus paddle upshifts, andthe left (−) minus paddle downshifts

When using the Manual PaddleShift feature while in M (ManualMode), the current gear will bedisplayed in the instrument cluster,or the Head-Up Display (HUD),if equipped. See Head-Up Display(HUD) on page 5-29.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,shifting to 2 (Second) or 3 (Third)gear allows the vehicle to gain moretraction.

The Manual Paddle Shift systemcan be deactivated by moving theshift lever from M (Manual Mode)back to D (Drive).

When the shift lever is in D (Drive),press either the right (+) plus paddleor the left (−) minus paddle to placethe transmission in TemporaryManual Paddle Shift mode. Thegear indicator by the shift lever, inthe cluster, and in the HUD willdisplay an M, even though the shiftlever is still in D (Drive). To exit thesystem, hold the (+) plus paddle formore than one second. The systemwill return to automatic shifting aftersix seconds of cruising at a steadyspeed, no manual shifts, noaggressive cornering, or when thevehicle comes to a stop.

While the Manual Paddle Shift gearselection system is active, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift through the gears as thevehicle slows. The transmission willselect 1 (First) gear as the vehiclestops. From a stop, the vehicle willstart from and hold 1 (First) gearunless the manual paddle shifts areused to shift into a different gear,or D (Drive) is selected.

If the left (−) minus paddle is helddown briefly, the transmission willdownshift to the lowest gearpossible for the vehicles speed.If the paddle continues to be held asthe vehicle slows, downshifts willcontinue to occur as vehicle speedallows. This feature also workswhile in Temporary Manual PaddleShift mode, but the driver must firstpress and release the (−) minuspaddle to enter Temporary ManualPaddle Shift mode, then press andhold the (−) minus paddle briefly.

The Manual Paddle Shift system willnot allow either an upshift or adownshift if the vehicle speed is toofast or too slow, nor will it allow astart from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.

If upshifting does not occur whenneeded, vehicle speed will belimited to protect the engine.

When a requested shift is denieddue to the speed restrictions shown,a DIC message will be displayed,and the current gear remainsdisplayed in the cluster and HUD.



Manual Paddle Shift operation isavailable for use with cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 9-48.

The vehicle speeds required forManual Paddle Shift upshiftsdepend on several vehicle inputs,which will vary the allowed up-shiftspeed by a few km/h (mph).

For vehicles with a 2.41:1 AxleRatio (RPOGXB). Upshifts to 4 (Fourth) gear

require approximately 37 km/h(23 mph).

. Upshifts to 5 (Fifth) gear requireapproximately 48 km/h (30 mph).

. Upshifts to 6 (Sixth) gear requireapproximately 60 km/h (37 mph).

. Upshifts to 7 (Seventh) gearrequire approximately 74 km/h(46 mph).

. Upshifts to 8 (Eighth) gearrequire approximately 95 km/h(59 mph).

To prevent damage to thepowertrain, Manual Paddledownshifts to a lower gear cannotbe done above certain speeds. Themaximum speed allowed fordownshifting of gears 1 (First)through 6 (Sixth) are:. Into 6 (Sixth) gear over 309 km/h

(192 mph).. Into 5 (Fifth) gear over 243 km/h

(151 mph).. Into 4 (Fourth) gear over

183 km/h (114 mph).. Into 3 (Third) gear over 149 km/h

(93 mph).. Into 2 (Second) gear over

100 km/h (62 mph).. Into 1 (First) gear over 62 km/h

(39 mph).

For vehicles with a 2.73:1 AxleRatio (RPOGU2). Upshifts to 4 (Fourth) gear

require approximately 34 km/h(21 mph).

. Upshifts to 5 (Fifth) gear requireapproximately 43 km/h (27 mph).

. Upshifts to 6 (Sixth) gear requireapproximately 55 km/h (34 mph).

. Upshifts to 7 (Seventh) gearrequire approximately 64 km/h(40 mph).

. Upshifts to 8 (Eighth) gearrequire approximately 82 km/h(51 mph).

To prevent damage to thepowertrain, Manual Paddledownshifts to a lower gear cannotbe done above certain speeds. Themaximum speed allowed fordownshifting of gears 1 (First)through 7 (Seventh) are:. Into 7 (Seventh) gear over

321 km/h (199 mph).. Into 6 (Sixth) gear over 272 km/h

(169 mph).. Into 5 (Fifth) gear over 214 km/h

(133 mph).. Into 4 (Fourth) gear over

161 km/h (100 mph).



. Into 3 (Third) gear over 131 km/h(93 mph).

. Into 2 (Second) gear over88 km/h (62 mph).

. Into 1 (First) gear over 55 km/h(39 mph).

If an upshift is not requested as theengine speed approaches fuel shutoff rpm, the engine speed will belimited to protect the engine. SeeTachometer on page 5-12.

Manual Transmission

To operate:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as theaccelerator pedal is pressed.

This can be done if the vehicle isgoing less than 64 km/h (40 mph).If the vehicle is at a complete stopand it is hard to shift into 1 (First),put the shift lever in Neutral and letup on the clutch. Then press theclutch pedal back down and shiftinto 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalwhile letting up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as the accelerator pedal ispressed.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth),6 (Sixth), and 7 (Seventh): Shiftinto 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth),6 (Sixth), and 7 (Seventh) the sameway as for 2 (Second).

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use to start or idle theengine. Neutral is the centerposition of the shift pattern.

R (Reverse): To back up, push theclutch pedal and shift intoR (Reverse). Additional pressuremay be needed to move the leverpast 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.



The vehicle can be safely shiftedinto R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph).If the vehicle is going faster thanthat, R (Reverse) is locked out.

Shift Speeds

Use the following shift speeds,shown in km/h (mph), for the bestfuel economy.

1 to 4 27 (17)

4 to 5 40 (25)

5 to 6 64 (40)

6 to 7 72 (45)

{ Caution

When shifting gears, do not movethe shift lever aroundunnecessarily. This may damagethe transmission. Shift directlyinto the next gear.

1–4 Shift Message

When the DIC displays thismessage, the vehicle can only beshifted from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth).

See Transmission Messages onpage 5-44.

Downshifting

Do not downshift into the gear at aspeed greater than shown:

1 (First) 72 km/h (45 mph)

2 (Second) 107 km/h (67 mph)

3 (Third) 160 km/h(100 mph)

4 (Fourth) 233 km/h(145 mph)

{ Caution

When downshifting, if more thanone gear is skipped, or the engineis racing when the clutch pedal is

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

released, the engine, clutch,driveshaft or transmission couldbe damaged.

If the engine speed drops below900 rpm, or if the engine is notrunning smoothly, downshift to thenext lower gear. It may benecessary to downshift two or moregears.

The transmission has a spring thatcenters the shift lever near 3 (Third)and 4 (Fourth). This spring helps toknow what gear the shift lever is inwhen shifting. Be careful whenshifting from 1 (First) to 2 (Second)or downshifting from 7 (Seventh) to6 (Sixth). The spring will try to pullthe shift lever toward 4 (Fourth) and3 (Third). Move the lever into2 (Second) or 6 (Sixth) and do notlet the shift lever move in thedirection of the pulling, or it couldshift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) orfrom 7 (Seventh) to 4 (Fourth).



If the vehicle is not upshifted as theengine speed approaches fuel shutoff rpm, the engine speed will belimited to protect the engine. SeeTachometer on page 5-12.

Active Rev MatchVehicles equipped with a manualtransmission have Active Rev Match(ARM). ARM aids in smoothershifting by matching the enginespeed to the next selected gear. Bymonitoring shift lever and clutchoperation, ARM adjusts enginespeed to match a calibrated valuebased on gear selection. Onupshifts and downshifts, enginespeed will be increased anddecreased to match vehicle roadspeed and transmission gearposition. ARM is maintained for afew seconds between shifts, thendeactivates if the shift is notcompleted.

The system is activated anddeactivated by pressing either of thepaddles marked REV MATCH onthe steering wheel. The systemmust be activated with each newignition cycle.

A gear indicator in the instrumentcluster displays the current gearselected:. When ARM is activated, the

gear number is amber.. When ARM is deactivated, the

gear number is white.. A white dash indicates that

service is required. ARM will bedisabled, and the malfunctionindicator lamp will be on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-18. The clutch andmanual transmission willcontinue to operate normally.

ARM will also:. Be active above 32 km/h

(20 mph).. Match engine speed up to

5400 rpm.. Not operate when the

accelerator pedal is applied.. Be disabled when the coolant

temperature is below 0°C (32°F).



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-22.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch is on thecenter console. The EPB canalways be activated, even if theignition is off. To prevent drainingthe battery, avoid repeated cycles ofthe EPB when the engine is notrunning.

The system has a red parking brakestatus light and an amber parkingbrake warning light. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-21and Service Electric Parking BrakeLight on page 5-21. There are alsoparking brake-related DriverInformation Center (DIC) messages.See Brake System Messages onpage 5-34. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe red parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

The red parking brake status lightwill flash and then stay on once theEPB is fully applied. If the redparking brake status light flashes

continuously, then the EPB is onlypartially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DICmessage will display. Release theEPB and try to apply it again. If thelight does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if the redparking brake status light is flashing.See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-21.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, lift up on the EPB switchand hold it up. Continue to hold theswitch until the red parking brakestatus light remains on. If the amberparking brake warning light remainson, see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld up. If the switch is held up untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations whenthe vehicle is not moving. This is



normal, and is done to periodicallycheck the correct operation of theEPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Push down momentarily on theEPB switch.

The EPB is released when the redparking brake status light is off.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, release the EPB bypushing down on the EPB switchand holding it down. Continue tohold the switch until the red parkingbrake status light is off. If either lightstays on after release is attempted,see your dealer.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

The EPB can also be used toprevent roll back for vehicles with amanual transmission taking off on ahill. When no roll back is desired, anapplied EPB will allow both feet tobe used for the clutch andaccelerator pedals in preparation forstarting the vehicle moving in the

intended direction. In this case,there is no need to push the switchto release the EPB.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when the



brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)If equipped, HSA may automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is stoppedon a grade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. During thetransition from releasing the brakepedal to accelerating to drive off ona grade, HSA holds the brakingpressure to prevent rolling. HSA willnot activate if the vehicle is in adrive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and a StabiliTraksystem. These systems help limitwheel spin and assist the driver inmaintaining control, especially onslippery road conditions.

TCS activates if it senses that therear wheels are spinning too muchor are beginning to lose traction.When this happens, TCS appliesthe brakes to the spinning wheeland reduces engine power (byclosing the throttle and managingengine spark) to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the

vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control will automaticallydisengage. Cruise control may bereengaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9-48.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-13 and “Turning theSystems Off and On” later in thissection.



The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The TCS/StabiliTrak button is on thecenter console.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The Traction

Off Light i illuminates in theinstrument cluster. To turn TCS onagain, press and release the gbutton. The Traction Off Light idisplayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the Traction Off Light i and



StabiliTrak OFF light g illuminateand stay on in the instrumentcluster.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The Traction Off Light iand StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system is malfunctioning and theDIC displays SERVICE TIREMONITOR SYSTEM, StabiliTrak willbe affected as follows:. StabiliTrak cannot be turned off

by the driver.. If StabiliTrak is off, it will be

turned on automatically.. Competitive Driving Mode or

Performance TractionManagement is unavailable.

. StabiliTrak will feel different inaiding and maintainingdirectional control.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

Driver Mode Control

The Driver Mode Selector knob ison the console behind the shiftlever.

There are five modes for differentdriving conditions: Weather, Eco,Tour, Sport, and Track.

The outer ring turns to change themodes, which display in theinstrument cluster.

Press the button in the center of theknob for Stability Control andTraction Control, or if the vehicle isin Track mode with PerformanceTraction Management (PTM). SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-37 or theinformation on PTM in CompetitiveDriving Mode on page 9-43.

When PTM is active, the outer ringwill change the PTM mode and theDriver mode will display in theinstrument cluster.



Each mode is configured for use indifferent driving conditions. Use:. Weather mode for rain

and snow.. Eco mode to improve fuel

economy.. Tour mode for comfortable

normal driving.. Sport mode for spirited on road

driving.. Track mode for track use.

There are 12 attributes that vary bymode shown below. Not all vehicleshave all features, depending on thevehicle options.



Modes: WEATHER ECO TOURDefault

SPORT TRACK

Cluster Display Tour Tour Tour Sport Track

Throttle Progression Weather Normal Normal Sport Sport

Trans Shift Mode (if equipped) Normal Normal Normal Sport Track

Active Fuel Management Normal Eco Normal Normal Normal

Exhaust Mode Eco Eco Tour Sport Track

Steering Comfort Comfort Comfort Sport Track

StabiliTrak Normal Normal Normal Normal Comp ModeAvail

Electronic Limited Slip (if equipped) Mode 1 Mode 1 Mode 1 Modes 2& 3

Modes 2& 3

Magnetic Ride (if equipped) Tour Tour Tour Sport Track

Launch Control NA NA NA NA Available

Traction Control Weather Normal Normal Normal Track

Performance Traction or Competitive DrivingMode (if equipped)

Off Off Off Off Available



Driver Mode Selector AttributesAffected

The Gauge Cluster Display isconfigured for each mode whenlinked (default):. Tour: Modern theme which

features displays for audio andnavigation.

. Sport: Classic easy to readSports Car gauges.

. Track: Gauges design based onCorvette Racing display with laptimer.

Throttle Progression

Adjusts throttle sensitivity byselecting how quick or slow thethrottle reacts to input.

Transmission Shift Mode − PaddleShift Automatic. Adjusts to either a smoother or

firmer shift.. Sport – Performance Algorithm

Liftfoot (PAL) recognizesaggressive throttle maneuvers

and holds lower gears forgreater engine braking andenhanced vehicle control whennot using paddles. (Available inSport or Track mode.)

. Track – Performance AlgorithmShift (PAS) recognizesaggressive cornering, heavybraking, and high acceleration toselect and hold lower gearswhen not using paddles.

Active Fuel Management (enginecylinder shuts off)4-Cylinder Mode. Normal with automatic

transmission: The engine uses8-cylinder mode whenaccelerating, but changes to4-cylinder mode when coasting.

. With manual transmission:Active Fuel Management onlyactive in Eco mode.

. Off in Manual mode withautomatic transmission unless inEco mode.

. Eco keeps the engine in4-cylinder mode unless heavyacceleration is needed.

Exhaust (variable mode exhaustsystem)

Changes when the variable exhaustvalves open.

Steering (Assist Effort)

Adjusts from a lighter steering feelto reduced assist for moresteering feel.

Magnetic Ride Control (ifequipped)

Adjusts the shock dampeningfirmness based on drivingconditions to improve comfort andperformance.

Launch Control

Available only in Track mode formaximum “off–the–line” accelerationwhen in Competitive or PTM modes.



Stability Control. Competitive Driving Mode allows

less computer control to permitsome slide and drift and isselected with the g button – onlyavailable in Track mode.

. StabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and holding the gbutton for 10 seconds.

PTM (Performance TractionManagement) (if equipped). Available in Track mode.. There are five selectable

settings if Competitive DrivingMode is activated.

Competitive Driving ModeIf equipped, Competitive DrivingMode, Performance TractionManagement, and Launch Controlare systems designed to allowincreased performance whileaccelerating and/or cornering. Thisis accomplished by regulating andoptimizing the engine, brakes, and

suspension performance. Thesemodes are for use at a closedcourse race track and are notintended for use on public roads.They will not compensate for driverinexperience or lack of familiaritywith the race track. Drivers whoprefer to allow the system to havemore control of the engine, brake,and suspension are advised to turnthe normal traction control andStabiliTrak systems on.

{ Caution

Attempting to shift when the drivewheels are spinning and do nothave traction may cause damageto the transmission. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicleis not covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not attempt to shiftwhen the drive wheels do nothave traction.

Competitive Driving Mode(Except Z51 and Z06 withMagnetic Ride Control)

Competitive Driving Mode allows fullengine power while StabiliTrakhelps maintain directional control ofthe vehicle by selective brakeapplication. In this mode, TCS is offand Launch Control is available.Adjust your driving style to accountfor the available engine power. See“Launch Control” later in thissection.



These lights are on when thevehicle is in the CompetitiveDriving Mode.

In order to select this optionalhandling mode, the vehicle modemust be Track. Then quickly pressthe TCS/StabiliTrak g button on thecenter console two times.COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODEdisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-39.

When the g button is pressed

again, the traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g will go out.

Performance TractionManagement (Z51 and Z06 withMagnetic Ride Control)

Performance Traction Management(PTM) integrates the TractionControl, StabiliTrak, and MagneticRide Control systems to provideimproved and consistentperformance when cornering. Theamount of available engine power isbased on the mode selected, trackconditions, driver skill, and theradius of each corner.

This light is on when the vehicle isin the PTM mode.

To select this optional handlingmode, the vehicle mode must beTrack. Then quickly press the TCS/StabiliTrak g button on the centerconsole two times. PERF TRAC 1 -WET ACTIVE HANDLING ONdisplays in the DIC.

To experience the performancebenefit of this system, after enteringa curve and at the point wherenormal acceleration occurs, fullypush the accelerator pedal. ThePTM system will modify the level ofengine power for a smooth andconsistent corner exit.



The PTM system contains fivemodes. These modes are selectedby turning the Selective RideControl/Performance TractionManagement MODE SELECT knobon the center console. Scroll up ordown through modes 1–5 by turningthe MODE SELECT knob to theright or left.

The following is a DIC displaydescription and the recommendedusage of each mode:

PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVEHANDLING ON. Intended for all driver skill levels.. Wet or damp conditions only —

not intended for use in heavyrain or standing water.

. StabiliTrak is on and enginepower is reduced based onconditions.

PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVEHANDLING ON. For use by less experienced

drivers or while learning a newtrack.

. Dry conditions only.

. StabiliTrak is on and enginepower is slightly reduced.

PERF TRAC 3 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING ON. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track.. Dry conditions only.. Requires more driving skill than

mode 2.. StabiliTrak is on and more

engine power is available than inmode 2.

PERF TRAC 4 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING OFF. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track.. Dry conditions only.. Requires more driving skill than

modes 2 or 3.. StabiliTrak is off and available

engine power is the same asmode 3.



PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVEHANDLING OFF. For use by experienced drivers

who are familiar with the track.. Dry conditions only.. Requires more driving skill than

in other modes.. StabiliTrak is off and engine

power is available for maximumcornering speed.

Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak g button to turn off PTMand return to the traction control andStabiliTrak systems. The traction offlight i and StabiliTrak OFF light gwill go out.

Launch Control (TrackMode Only)

A Launch Control feature isavailable, within Competitive DrivingMode (except Z51 and Z06 withMagnetic Ride Control) orPerformance Traction Management(Z51 and Z06 with Magnetic Ride

Control), on all vehicles to allow thedriver to achieve high levels ofvehicle acceleration in a straightline. Launch Control is a form oftraction control that manages tirespin while launching the vehicle.This feature is intended for useduring closed course race eventswhere consistent zero to60 and quarter mile times aredesirable.

Launch Control is only availablewhen the following criteria are met:. Competitive Driving Mode is

selected (except Z51 and Z06with Magnetic Ride Control) orany of the Performance TractionManagement modes areselected (Z51 and Z06 withMagnetic Ride Control). TheTCS light comes on theinstrument panel and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays.

. The vehicle is not moving.

. The steering wheel is pointingstraight.

Manual Transmissions. The clutch is pressed and the

vehicle is in 1 (First) gear.. The accelerator pedal is rapidly

applied to wide open throttle.

The Launch Control feature willinitially limit engine speed as thedriver rapidly applies the acceleratorpedal to wide open throttle. Allowthe engine rpm to stabilize.A smooth, quick release of theclutch, while maintaining the fullypressed accelerator pedal, willmanage wheel slip. Complete shiftsas described in ManualTransmission on page 9-31.

Automatic Transmissions. The brake pedal must be firmly

pressed to the floor, equivalentto a panic brake event.

. The accelerator pedal is rapidlyapplied to wide open throttle. (Ifthe vehicle rolls due to wideopen throttle, release thethrottle, press the brake pedal



more firmly, and re-apply theaccelerator to wide openthrottle.)

The Launch Control feature willinitially limit engine speed as thedriver rapidly applies the acceleratorpedal to wide open throttle. Allowthe engine rpm to stabilize.A smooth, quick release of thebrake pedal, while maintaining thefully pressed accelerator pedal, willmanage wheel slip.

After the vehicle is launched, thesystem continues in CompetitiveDriving Mode (except Z51 and Z06with Magnetic Ride Control) orPerformance Traction Management(Z51 and Z06 with Magnetic RideControl).

Competitive Driving Mode, PTM,and Launch Control are systemsdesigned for a closed course racetrack and not intended for use onpublic roads. The systems are notintended to compensate for lack ofdriver experience or familiarity withthe race track.

Limited-Slip Differential(Except Z51 and Z06)If equipped, the mechanicallimited-slip differential can give moretraction on snow, mud, ice, sand,or gravel. It works like a standardaxle most of the time, but whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Forvehicles with limited slip differential,driven under severe conditions, therear axle fluid should be changed.See Competitive Driving Mode onpage 9-43 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

Limited-Slip Differential(Z51 and Z06 Only)If equipped, the Electronic LimitedSlip Differential (ELSD) isautomatically activated. ELSDactively monitors vehicle sensorsand driver inputs to determine theamount of change for theconditions. With ELSD, thevehicle has:. Enhanced high-speed control.. Improved traction through

corners, allowing moreacceleration.

. More precise steering.

. Increased vehicle agility.

. Integration with StabiliTrak.

For vehicles with limited slipdifferential, driven under severeconditions, the rear axle fluid shouldbe changed. See CompetitiveDriving Mode on page 9-43 andMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morecan be maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with a manualtransmission, the cruise control willremain active when the gears are

shifted. The cruise is disengaged ifthe clutch is pressed for severalseconds.

If the Traction Control System (TCS)begins to limit wheel spin while youare using cruise control, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-37.When road conditions allow forusing safely again, cruise controlcan be turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

1 (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on or off. A white indicatorcomes on in the instrument clusterwhen cruise is turned on.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate): Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press briefly to resume to thatspeed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET/– (Set/Coast): Press briefly toset the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the 1 button is on when not inuse, SET/– or RES/+ could getpressed and go into cruise when notdesired. Keep the 1 button offwhen cruise is not being used.



1. Press the 1 button to turn thecruise system on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET/– .

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster on page 5-7.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, brieflypress the RES/+ button. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold RES/+ until the

desired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressRES/+. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster onpage 5-7. The increment value useddepends on the unites displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold SET/– until the

desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressSET/–. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster onpage 5-7. The increment value useddepends on the unites displayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET/– will result in cruiseset to the current vehicle speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. When going downhill, youmight have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep your speeddown. If the brake pedal is applied,cruise control will disengage.

Cruise Control in Manual PaddleShift Gear Selection

When the vehicle is in M (ManualMode) and the manual paddle shiftcontrols are not being used, cruisecontrol operates in the samemanner as D (Drive).

When the vehicle is in M (ManualMode) and the manual paddle shiftcontrols are being used, cruisecontrol operates as follows:. If cruise control is active and a

gear is selected with the manualpaddle shift controls, the vehicle

speed is maintained in the driverselected gear and will notautomatically upshift ordownshift the transmission whilethe driver’s gear selection isactive.

. If driving in hilly terrain, cruisecontrol may not be able tomaintain vehicle speed if anupshift or downshift is notselected by the driver. Whiledriving on hilly terrain and cruisecontrol is active with a manualpaddle shift gear selection, thedriver must select the propergear for the terrain or select D(Drive) on the gear rangeselector for full automatictransmission operation.

Ending Cruise Control. Step lightly on the brake pedal.. If equipped with a manual

transmission, press the clutchpedal for several seconds orshift to Neutral to disengagecruise control.

. Press*.

. To turn off cruise control,press 1.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 1 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.



Driver AssistanceSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The RVC system can assist thedriver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object located outside thecamera's field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Perceived distances may bedifferent from actual distances.Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen. Failure touse proper care before backingmay result in injury, death,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or vehicle damage. Always checkbehind and around the vehiclebefore backing.

An image appears on theinfotainment screen when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The infotainment screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To return to the previous screensooner, do one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park), for an

automatic transmission.. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Guidance Lines

The RVC system may have aguidance line overlay that can helpthe driver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the guidance lines on or off:

1. On the infotainment system,press the Settings screenbutton, or turn the MENU knobto highlight Settings andpress MENU.

2. Select Rear Camera.

3. Select Guidance Lines and thenselect Off or On.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay when the system is notoperating properly.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited. It does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper and can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. Displayed imagesmay be closer or farther than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlamps are shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend TOPTIER Detergent Gasolines. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasolines.

If equipped with the LT1 engine, usepremium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with a

posted octane rating of 91 or higher.Regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher can be used,but acceleration and fuel economywill be reduced, and an audibleknocking noise may be heard. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at91 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 91 octane rating orhigher, the engine needs service.

If equipped with the LT4supercharged engine, use premiumunleaded gasoline meeting ASTMspecification D4814 with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. If theoctane is less than 91, damage tothe engine may occur and may voidthe vehicle warranty. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 91 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.



{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-18. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-53.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the only



gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait forany hiss noise to stop prior tobeginning to flow fuel

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door. The fuel door is lockedwhen the vehicle doors are locked.Press K on the RKE transmitter tounlock. With passive locking, thedriver door must be opened firstbefore the fuel door will unlock.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuelcap. The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds before removing thenozzle. After initial shutoff, do notpartially remove the nozzle to addmore fuel as this will result in fuelspillage. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-82.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portablegas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from inside the vehicle.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause afire and you or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return it to thestorage location.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-24 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-25.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-18Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-20Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-22

Cooling System (AeroPanel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-27Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-37

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Competition OrientedTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-51Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-67Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-82Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and


Vehicle Care 10-3

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-25.

Lifting the Vehicle

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle can cause aninjury. The vehicle can slip off thejack and roll over you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured. Find a level placeto lift your vehicle. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, put blocksin front of and behind the wheels.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle or the vehiclemay fall and cause injury to youor others.

If a jack is used to lift the vehicle,follow the instructions that camewith the jack, and be sure to use thecorrect lifting points to avoiddamaging the vehicle.


10-4 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Lifting the vehicle improperly candamage it and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. To lift the vehicleproperly and prevent vehicledamage:

. Be sure to place a block orpad between the jack and thevehicle.

. Lift only in the areas shown inthe following illustrations.

For additional information, seeyour dealer and the ChevroletCorvette service manual.

{ Caution

The front jack pads must notcontact the rocker panels, thefront fenders, or the floor pan.If they do, damage may occur.

Lifting from the Front – Cradle

The front lifting points can beaccessed from either side of thevehicle, behind the front tires.

1. Locate the front lifting points.

2. Place a block or pad betweenthe jack and the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack.

Lifting from the Front – Frame

Use only a service jack with a liftingpad diameter of 64 mm (2.5 in) orsmaller, and thick enough to makesure the jack does not contact thevehicle body.

Position the service jack and liftingpad under the frame rail shippingslot reinforcement.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Lifting from the Rear – Cradle

The rear lifting points can beaccessed from the rear driver orpassenger side of the vehicle.

1. Locate the rear lifting points.

2. Place a block or pad betweenthe jack and the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack.

Lifting from the Rear – Frame

Use only a service jack with a liftingpad diameter of 64 mm (2.5 in) orsmaller, and thick enough to makesure the jack does not contact thevehicle body.

Position the service jack and liftingpad under the frame rail shippingslot reinforcement.

For more information, see DoingYour Own Service Work onpage 10-5.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.


10-6 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-24.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-15.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release leverinside the vehicle. It is below theinstrument panel on thedriver side.

2. Go to the side of the vehicle andpull up on the rear edge of thehood, near the windshield.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Then,pull the hood down and close itfirmly.


Vehicle Care 10-7

Engine Compartment Overview

6.2L LT1 V8 Engine (without Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank)


10-8 Vehicle Care

1. Passenger Compartment AirFilter on page 8-5 (Out of View).

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10-24.

3. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-39.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-20.

5. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System(Aero Panel) on page 10-23 orCooling System (Engine) onpage 10-22.

6. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under BrakeFluid on page 10-32.

7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-12.

8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10-29.

9. Clutch Master CylinderReservoir (If Equipped). SeeHydraulic Clutch on page 10-19.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-28.


Vehicle Care 10-9

6.2L LT1 V8 Engine (with Z51 – Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank)


10-10 Vehicle Care


2. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank FillCap. See “Changing Engine Oiland Filter” Engine Oil onpage 10-12.










Vehicle Care 10-11

6.2L LT4 V8 Engine (with Z06 – Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank)


10-12 Vehicle Care


2. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank FillCap. See “Changing Engine Oiland Filter” Engine Oil onpage 10-12.









Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-18.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil (ExceptZ51 and Z06)

If the ENGINE OIL LOW–ADD OILmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), check theengine oil level right away. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5-37.Check the engine oil level regularly.

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-7 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andcheck within five and 10 minutesof shutoff. Checking the oil leveltoo soon after engine shutoff willnot provide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull the dipstick and wipe it witha clean paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil(Except Z51 and Z06)

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

See Track Events and CompetitiveDriving on page 9-5 for additionalinformation on engine oil.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-7 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil(Z51 and Z06)

1. Engine Oil Dipstick2. Engine Oil Fill Cap

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is aloop. The dipstick is located on thedry sump engine oil tank. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-7 for the location of the drysump engine oil tank.

These vehicles have aracetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. This highperformance system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system and requires aspecial procedure when checkingthe engine oil level. Follow thisprocedure closely.

The engine oil level must bechecked when the engine is warm.Cold oil level in the dry sump tankmay not indicate the actual amountof oil in the system. With thissystem, engine oil is contained in anexternal tank, separate from theengine. Under normal operatingconditions, the oil pan under theengine does not store any oil. If thevehicle has been parked for anextended period without the enginebeing started, some oil will seepback into the oil pan, reducing theamount of oil held in the dry sumptank and there could be no engineoil at all showing on the dipstick.This is normal since the dipstick isdesigned to read the engine oil level

only after the engine has run longenough to reach normal operatingtemperature. Do not add engine oilbased on cold engine dipstickreadings. The engine oil level on thedipstick will also be inaccurate ifchecked while the engine is running.

1. To obtain an accurate engine oillevel reading, warm up theengine to at least 80°C (175°F).Cold oil will not give a correct oillevel reading.

2. Once the engine is warm, turnoff the engine. Checking the oilwhile the engine is running willresult in an incorrect oil levelreading.

3. Check the oil level between fiveand 10 minutes after the engineis shut down.


Vehicle Care 10-15

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

4. Remove the dipstick from theexternal engine oil tank and wipeit with a clean lint-free papertowel or a cloth. Re-insert thedipstick into the external oil tank,pushing it all the way in until itstops.

5. Remove the dipstick from the oiltank and read the level on thecross-hatched area.

When to Add Engine Oil(Z51 and Z06)

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oilthrough the oil fill cap opening in theoil tank and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”for an explanation of what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

See Track Events and CompetitiveDriving on page 9-5 for additionalinformation on engine oil.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-7 for the location of theexternal engine oil tank and fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback into the oil tank when through.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Changing Engine Oil and Filter(Z51 and Z06)

The vehicle may have aracetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. This highperformance system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system and requires aspecial procedure when changingthe engine oil and filter. Follow thisprocedure closely when changingthe engine oil and filter.

1. Engine Oil Drain Plugs2. Seals

Steps to follow:

1. Remove the two engine oil drainplugs from the bottom of theengine oil pan. One drain plugdrains the external oil tank viathe oil transfer supply line. Theother drain plug drains residualoil from the crankcase sump.Allow the oil to drain.

2. Once the oil has been drainedfrom the engine, remove theengine oil filter and allow the oilto drain.

3. Reinstall both drain plugs andtighten them to 25 Y (18 lb ft).

4. Replace the oil filter and tightenit to 3/4 to 1 turn after gasketcontact. See MaintenanceReplacement Parts onpage 11-13 for the correct filter.

5. Oil is filled through the openingin the top of the external engineoil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.

6. Add oil to the oil tank. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

7. Install the oil fill cap and insertthe dipstick, if removed.

8. Start the engine and let it run atidle for at least 15 seconds. Thiswill circulate the fresh engine oilthrough the lubrication system.

9. Shut off the engine and checkthe oil level as described under“Checking Engine Oil(Z51 and Z06).”

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.


Vehicle Care 10-17

GM recommends Mobil 1® engineoils that show the dexos1 approvedlogo for its dry sump equippedengines.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used.An oil of this viscosity grade willprovide easier cold starting for theengine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

For track events or competitivedriving, use Mobil 1® 15W-50 engineoil. An instrument cluster warninglight will be illuminated at high oiltemperatures. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1™ specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer thatindicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

Z51 and Z06 models have aracetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. This highperformance system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system and requires aspecial procedure when changingthe engine oil and filter. See EngineOil on page 10-12.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change is

necessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Scroll through the DIC InfoPages menu until theREMAINING OIL LIFEpercentage is displayed. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26.

2. Press and hold the SEL buttonon the DIC while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. The oil life willchange to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soon

as possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11-12for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchIt is not necessary to regularlycheck clutch fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak in thesystem. Adding fluid will not correcta leak. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

The fluid will darken over time. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2 for when to replace thefluid.

When to Check and Whatto Use


10-20 Vehicle Care

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoircap has this symbol on it. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-7 for reservoir location.

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for theproper fluid to use. The fluidrequires changing. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The hydraulicclutch fluid system should be closedand sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-7 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

{ Caution

If water is sprayed and enters theengine air cleaner/filter intake andhousing, the engine could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2. If driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To remove the hood extractor ductto gain access:

1. Bolts (4)2. Hood Extractor Duct


Vehicle Care 10-21

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-6.

2. Remove the four bolts (1) andthe hood extractor duct (2).

3. Reverse Step 2 to replace thehood extractor duct.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Surge Tank Coolant Hose2. Screws (2)3. Hose Retainers (2)4. Air Duct Clamp5. Electrical Connector

{ Caution

If the engine coolant surge tankhose is not carefully lifted out ofthe hose retainers on the aircleaner/filter cover assembly, itmay be damaged and causeengine coolant to leak. Damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

1. Carefully lift the surge tankcoolant hose (1) from both hoseretainers (3) and position thehose to be able to remove thescrews securing the air cleaner/filter endcap.

2. Loosen the air duct clamp (4) atthe air cleaner/filter housingendcap and move the duct out ofthe way.

3. Remove the electricalconnector (5) from the sensor.

4. Remove the two screws (2).

5. Turn the air cleaner/filter endcapdownward and disengage thelower endcap mounting tabsfrom the lower retention hingefeatures. Be sure to insert thelower endcap mounting tabs fullyinto the housing retention hingefeatures before turning theendcap upward and replacingthe screws.

6. Inspect or replace the aircleaner/filter.

7. Reverse Steps 1–6 to replacethe air cleaner/filter endcap.


10-22 Vehicle Care

8. Replace the extractor hood duct.See above.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling System (Engine)The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

LT1 Engine (without Dry SumpEngine Oil Tank)

1. Coolant Surge Tank withPressure Cap

2. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

LT1 Engine (with Dry SumpEngine Oil Tank)




Vehicle Care 10-23

LT4 Engine (with Dry SumpEngine Oil Tank)



{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not running

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Cooling System (AeroPanel)The aero panel enhancesaerodynamic efficiency andimproves fuel economy.

Remove the aero panel and bracketto improve engine cooling and airconditioning performance whendriving aggressively or in hotweather.


10-24 Vehicle Care

To remove the aero panel andbracket:

1. Press up on the two indents atthe bottom and lift the aeropanel off the bracket.

2. Unscrew the two fasteners thatsecure the bracket.

3. Gently pull the bracket awayfrom the grille.

To replace the bracket and aeropanel:

1. Position the bracket over thegrille.

2. Secure the bracket by pushingthe two fasteners into place.

3. Snap the aero panel into place.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12. Thefluid requires changing at certainintervals. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-27.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the proper

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-25

Warning (Continued)

coolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use amixture of 40% DEX-COOLcoolant and 60% clean, drinkablewater.

Use a mixture of 40% DEX-COOLcoolant and 60% clean, drinkablewater. If using this mixture, nothingelse needs to be added. Thismixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −28°C (−18°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding used

coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

If ambient temperatures areanticipated below −28°C (−18°F),make sure a proper mixture ratio of50% DEX-COOL coolant and 50%clean, drinkable water is used.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the cold fill line, add amixture of 40% DEX-COOL coolantand 60% clean, drinkable water atthe coolant recovery tank, but besure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done. See EngineOverheating on page 10-27.


10-26 Vehicle Care

The engine coolant surge tank istoward the rear of the enginecompartment on the passenger sideof the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at the cold fill line onthe coolant surge tank.

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the cold fillline. If the coolant is below the coldfill line when the engine is hot, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture directlyto the surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

1. When the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot, removethe pressure cap.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter turn and then stop.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture until the level insidestabilizes at the cold fill line onthe front of the surge tank.


Vehicle Care 10-27

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level stabilizes at thecold fill line on the coolantsurge tank.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

Check the level in the surge tankwhen the system has cooleddown. If the coolant is not at theproper level, repeat Steps 1−4,then reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant is not at the properlevel when the system coolsdown again, see the dealer.

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-15. The vehicle may alsodisplay a message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messageson page 5-37.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood but to get service help rightaway, see Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13-5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay away

(Continued)


10-28 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

from the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the shaded area or anoverheat warning no longer

displays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperature


Vehicle Care 10-29

may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesVisually inspect outer brake padsthrough the wheel. Replace brakepads when they are worn to 2 mmof pad thickness. New pads are10 mm (0.4 in) thick.

Brake Wear (Except Z06 Modelwith Z07 Package)

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Under certain weather or operatingconditions, occasional brake noisemight be heard with the vehicle'sperformance braking system. Thisbrake system is designed forsuperior fade resistance andconsistent operation using highperformance brake pads. Brakesqueal is normal and does not affectsystem performance.

Brake dust is normal on theperformance braking system. Thisdoes not indicate a problem with thebrake system.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Wear (Z06 Model withZ07 Package)

This vehicle does not have built-inbrake pad wear indicators. Visuallyinspect the brake pads periodicallyand any time the tires are removed.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Make sure that the brakes havebeen given sufficient time to cooland then set the parking brake.

Rear

Front

Z06 models with the Z07 packagehave an electronic brake pad wearsensor system. When pads areworn, the CHANGE BRAKE PADSmessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See BrakeSystem Messages on page 5-34.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Brake Rotor Wear

Z06 models may have ceramicbrake rotors. Visually inspect rotorswhenever the brake pads arereplaced. Weigh rotors before brakepads are replaced to confirm thatthe rotor mass is greater than thewear-out mass printed on the rotor.The rotor can be reused if theweight of the rotor is above themass limit. See the service manualfor rotor inspection and weighingmethods. See Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 13-11.

Brake Rotor Protector

{ Warning

Ceramic rotors will be very hotafter operation and touching themmay cause burns. Be sure brakesystem is completely cool prior toinstallation of protector, or comingin contact with them.

{ Caution

Rotors may be chipped if hardcontact is made with the wheelduring wheel installation orremoval. Always use the rotorprotectors. Follow the wheelremoval and installationinstructions.

A rotor protector should always beinstalled before any wheel removal.Install the protector by feeding itthrough the wheel spokes andslipping it over the outer edge of therotor. Leave the protector in place,over the rotor edge, until the wheelis reinstalled. Rotor protectors areavailable through your dealer.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-7 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7.

The fluid level should be above theMIN mark on the reservoir. If it isnot, have the brake hydraulicsystem checked to see if there isa leak.


Vehicle Care 10-33

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is between the MIN and MAXmarks.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

For battery replacement, see yourdealer or the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you are

(Continued)


10-34 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-79 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Some vehicles have a batterymaintainer package. Follow theinstructions provided with thebattery maintainer package to keepthe battery charged when thevehicle is not in use. Plug thebattery maintainer into the rear

Accessory Power Outlet (APO) only.The front APO turns off after theIgnition is off.

For vehicles without a batterymaintainer, see the followinginformation:

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

See “Window Indexing” underPower Windows on page 2-22.

Extended Storage: It isrecommended that the batterymaintainer package be used.However, if not, remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery.All vehicle memory settings willneed to be reset when batterypower is restored.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise is

heard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

The fluid level should be at or within13 mm (0.5 in) of the bottom of thefill plug hole threads. If it is at thislevel, no additional fluid is needed.If the fluid level is below 13 mm(0.5 in), add fluid until it is abovethis level.


Vehicle Care 10-35

What to Use

To add lubricant when the level islow or to completely refill afterdraining, see Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12. Thenfill to within 13 mm (0.5 in) of thebottom of the fill plug hole threadswith the required lubricant.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Electric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-35.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the


10-36 Vehicle Care

shift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission in

N (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-13.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Open the hood.

2. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

3. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

4. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.


Vehicle Care 10-37

5. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade arm to touch thewindshield.

6. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Windshield ReplacementThe windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the vehicle has to havethe windshield replaced, get onethat is designed for HUD or theHUD image may look out of focus.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-38.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ Warning

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.


10-38 Vehicle Care

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Push the lamp assembly towardthe right.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

LicensePlate Lamp

W5W LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the Instrument Panel FuseBlock. The same amperage fusecan also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThere is one fuse block in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-7 for more information onlocation.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


10-40 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 10-41

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

MicroJ-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Front Wiper

2 Starter

3 Antilock BrakeSystem Valves

4 Engine ControlModule

5 Electric ParkingBrake

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Front Heater,Ventilation, and AirConditioning

7 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

8 Logistics

J-CaseFuses

Usage

9 Vacuum Pump

10 Electronic RearDifferential Module

74 TransmissionCooling Fan 2

MicroFuses 2-pin

Usage

11 Heated Seat 1

12 Column LockModule

13 Steering Column

14 Glove Box

15 Engine InsidePosition

16 Body ControlModule 6

17 Heater, Ventilation,and AirConditioningControls

MicroFuses 2-pin

Usage


19 Heated Seat 2


21 Electric SteeringColumn Lock

22 Display

23 Auxiliary Outlet

24 Radio

25 InstrumentCluster HUD

26 Inside RearviewMirror

27 Odd Ignition

28 Even Ignition

29 Data LinkConnector

30 Seat Fan


10-42 Vehicle Care

MicroFuses 2-pin

Usage

31 Fuel Pump PowerModule

32 Exhaust Valve 1

33 Horn

34 Headlamp Washer

35 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

36 Engine OutsidePosition

37 Real TimeDamping

38 Intercooler

39 Left Headlamp

40 Right Headlpamp

41 HeadlampWasher Pump

42 Exhaust Valve 2

43 Reverse Lockout

MicroFuses 2-pin

Usage

44 Electric RearDifferential Module

45 Rear TransmissionCooler Fan

46 TransmissionControl Module

47 Canister Vent

MicroFuses 3-pin

Usage

48 Integrated ChassisControl Module/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

49 Theft/VehicleInterface Module

50 Engine/Transmission

51 Instrument Cluster

52 HeadlampHigh Beam

MicroFuses 3-pin

Usage

53 TransmissionControl Module/Engine ControlModule

MicroRelays

Usage

54 Starter

55 Front WiperLow/High

56 Run/Crank

57 Front Wiper Motor

58 Headlamp Washer

59 Air ConditioningControl

60 Logistics 1

61 Headlamp Low


Vehicle Care 10-43

Mini Relays Usage


63 Vacuum Pump

SPAREFUSES Usage

64 Spare

65 Spare

66 Spare

67 Spare

68 Spare

69 Spare

70 Spare

71 Spare

72 Spare

73 Spare

Rear Compartment FuseBlockThe rear compartment fuse block isin the rear of the vehicle, under theload floor. Lift the carpet and accessdoor in the center of the load floor toaccess the fuses.


10-44 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 10-45

You can remove fuses using thefuse puller.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Window

2 Driver Power Seat

3 PEPS 2

4 PEPS 1


6 Heated Mirrors


8 Rear WindowDefogger

9 GBS


11 Steering Wheel

Fuses Usage

12 PassengerPower Seat

13 Not Used

14 Outside RearviewMirror



17 Sensing DiagnosticModule/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

18 Logistics 2


20 Integrated ChassisControl Module

21 Amplifier

22 Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

23 Rear Closure

Fuses Usage

24 Memory SeatModule/Convertible Top

25 Theft-DeterrentPSM

26 Pressure Vent(Coupe Only)

27 OnStar (IfEquipped)

28 Not Used

29 Not Used

30 Fuel Pump PowerModule

31 Not Used

32 Battery RegulatedVoltage Control

33 Not Used

34 Convertible TopSolenoid

35 Not Used


10-46 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

36 Passenger WindowSwitch

37 Front AccessoryPower Outlet

38 Not Used

39 Spare

40 Spare

41 Spare

42 Spare

43 Spare

44 Spare

Relays Usage

R1 Logistics 2

R2 Rear WindowDefogger

R3 Not Used

R4 Front AccessoryPower Outlet

R5 Theft (Door LockSecurity)

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-47

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10-57 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-63.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.


10-48 Vehicle Care

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Run-Flat TiresThis vehicle, when new, had run-flattires. There is no spare tire, no tirechanging equipment, and no placeto store a tire in the vehicle.

The vehicle also has a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)that indicates a loss of tire pressurein any of the tires.

{ Warning

If the low tire warning lightdisplays on the instrument cluster,the handling capabilities will bereduced during severemaneuvers. Driving too fast couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured. Do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) whenthe low tire warning light isdisplayed. Drive cautiously andcheck the tire pressures as soonas possible.

Run-flat tires can be driven on withno air pressure. There is no need tostop on the side of the road tochange the tire. Continue driving;however, do not drive too far or toofast. Driving on the tire may not bepossible if there is permanentdamage. To prevent permanentdamage, the tire can be driven withno air pressure for up to 80 km(50 mi) at speeds slower than80 km/h (50 mph). As soon as

possible, contact the nearestauthorized GM or run-flat servicingfacility for inspection and repair orreplacement.

When driving on a deflated run-flattire, avoid potholes and other roadhazards that could damage the tireand/or wheel beyond repair. When atire has been damaged, or if drivenany distance while deflated, checkwith an authorized run-flat tireservice center to determine whetherthe tire can be repaired or should bereplaced. To maintain the run-flatfeature, all replacement tires mustbe run-flat tires.

To locate the nearest GM or run-flatservicing facility, call CustomerAssistance.

The valve stems on run-flat tireshave sensors that are part of theTPMS. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-57. Thesesensors contain batteries that aredesigned to last for 10 years under


Vehicle Care 10-49

normal driving conditions. See yourdealer for wheel or sensorreplacement.

{ Caution

Using liquid sealants can damagethe tire valves and tire pressuremonitor sensors in the run-flattires. This damage is not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notuse liquid sealants in run-flattires.

Low-Profile Tires

Low-Profile Performance Tire

The original equipment tires onthis vehicle are classified aslow-profile performance tires.These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wetor dry pavement, however, mayproduce more road noise andtend to wear faster.

{ Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Competition OrientedTiresThis vehicle may come with P285/30ZR19 and P335/25ZR20 MichelinPS CUP2 competition oriented tiresthat are DOT approved for streetuse. Competition oriented tires usea special tread pattern and

compound that provide more gripthan normal road tires. Theminimum tread depth will bereached earlier than typical tires,resulting in reduced tire life. Thisspecial tread pattern and compoundwill have decreased performance incold climates, heavy rain, andstanding water. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehiclewhen driving at temperatures belowapproximately 10°C (50°F) or on iceor snow covered roads. See WinterTires on page 10-47.

{ Warning

Driving on wet roads, in heavyrain, or through standing waterwith competition oriented tiresmay cause hydroplaning and lossof control. Use extreme cautionand drive slowly on wet roads.


10-50 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Driving with competition orientedtires on snow, ice, or cold roadsurfaces can cause loss of controlor an accident. Competitionoriented tires are summer seasontires and are not intended to bedriven on snow, ice, or roadsurfaces below 10°C (50°F). Donot drive a vehicle withcompetition oriented tires in theseconditions.

{ Caution

Competition oriented tires haverubber compounds that loseflexibility and may developsurface cracks in the tread areaat temperatures below -7°C (20°F). Always store competitionoriented tires indoors and attemperatures above -7°C (20°F)

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

when not in use. If the tires havebeen subjected to -7°C (20°F) orless, let them warm up in aheated space to at least 10°C(50°F) for 24 hours or morebefore being installed or driving avehicle on which they areinstalled. Do not apply heat orblow heated air directly on thetires. Always inspect tires beforeuse. See Tire Inspection onpage 10-61.

Summer TiresHigh Performance Summer Tires

This vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommend

installing winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving at temperaturesbelow approximately 5°C (40°F) oron ice or snow covered roads isexpected. See Winter Tires onpage 10-47.

{ Caution

High performance summer tireshave rubber compounds that loseflexibility and may developsurface cracks in the tread areaat temperatures below -7°C (20°F). Always store highperformance summer tiresindoors and at temperaturesabove -7°C (20°F) when not inuse. If the tires have beensubjected to -7°C (20°F) or less,let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5°C (40°F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated air

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-51

Caution (Continued)

directly on the tires. Alwaysinspect tires before use. See TireInspection on page 10-61.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger tire sidewall. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.


10-52 Vehicle Care

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-65.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.


Vehicle Care 10-53

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are

automatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-55.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14.


10-54 Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that faces

outward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-55 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-62.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-65.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-14.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.


10-56 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-14. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check the tirepressure. Proper tire inflationcannot be determined by lookingat the tire. Check the tireinflation pressure when the tiresare cold, meaning the vehiclehas not been driven for at leastthree hours or no more than1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget the pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure in high, presson the metal stem in the center


Vehicle Care 10-57

of the tire valve to release air.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

The tires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100mph) orhigher, where it is legal. Set the coldinflation pressure to the maximuminflation pressure shown on the tiresidewall, or 265 kPa (38 psi),whichever is lower. See theexample following. Return the tiresto the recommended cold tireinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-14.

Example:

The maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tiresidewall, in small letters, near the

rim flange. It will read something likethis: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at265 kPa (38 psi).

Racing or other competitive drivingmay affect the warranty coverage ofthe vehicle. See the warrantybooklet for more information.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the


10-58 Vehicle Care

vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-58.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly on your vehicle. TheTPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tires and transmitsthe tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-59

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning light,located in the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message appear ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire

pressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26 and TireMessages on page 5-43.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-55 foradditional information.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tire

maintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-61, Tire Rotation onpage 10-61, When It Is Time forNew Tires on page 10-62, and Tireson page 10-46.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10-70 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.


10-60 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. The TPMS sensor matching

process was not done or notcompleted successfully. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when the

TPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-63.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess — Auto LearnFunction

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. When a tire isinstalled, the vehicle must bestationary for about 20 minutesbefore the system recalculates. Thefollowing relearn process takes upto 10 minutes, driving at a minimumspeed of 19 km/h (12 mph).A dash (-) or pressure value willdisplay in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26 and Tire Messages onpage 5-43. A warning messagedisplays in the DIC if a problemoccurs during the relearn process.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationThe tires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km/7,500 mi. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Tires are rotated to achieveuniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheel

alignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-62and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-67.

Different tire sizes should not berotated front to rear.

Use this rotation pattern if thevehicle has different size tireson the front and rear.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label after


10-62 Vehicle Care

the tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-55and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-58.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-61 and TireRotation on page 10-61.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if


Vehicle Care 10-63

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-51, foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-61 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it is


10-64 Vehicle Care

necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, and ZR speed rated tires.Never exceed the winter tire'smaximum speed capability whenusing winter tires with a lowerspeed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes(other than those originallyinstalled on the vehicle), brands,or types may cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, resulting ina crash or other vehicle damage.Use the correct size, brand, andtype of tire on all four wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-58.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14, for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GM

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

specific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-63 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


10-66 Vehicle Care

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear. If thevehicle is vibrating when driving ona smooth road, the tires and wheelsmay need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.

Road Imperfections/Crown Effects

The vehicle's precise steering andhandling make it very responsive toroad surface feedback. A slight pullmay be felt in the steeringdepending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variationssuch as troughs or ruts. This isnormal and the vehicle does notrequire service.

Tire Chatter/Hop

When driving at slow speeds and invery tight turns, the vehicle mayhave tire chatter/hop. This is normaland the vehicle does not requireservice.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts with new GM originalequipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


10-68 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tireclearance to the body andchassis.

Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on studsor the threads of the wheel nuts.The wheel nuts might come looseand the wheel could fall off,causing a crash.

{ Warning

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose andeven come off. This could lead toa crash. Be sure to use thecorrect wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get newGM original equipmentwheel nuts.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification.

Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-69

Warning (Continued)

suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. See Tires onpage 10-46 for additionalinformation. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

The vehicle has no spare tire, notire changing equipment, and noplace to store a tire.

If the vehicle has run-flat tires, thereis no need to stop on the side of theroad to change a flat tire. SeeRun-Flat Tires on page 10-48.

{ Warning

Special tools and procedures arerequired to service a run-flat tire.If these special tools andprocedures are not used, injury orvehicle damage may occur.Always be sure the proper toolsand procedures, as described inthe service manual, are used.

If this vehicle does not have run-flattires and a tire goes flat, avoidfurther tire and wheel damage bydriving slowly to a level place, welloff the road, if possible. Turn on thehazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-4.


10-70 Vehicle Care

1. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Put an automatic transmission inP (Park) or a manualtransmission in 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

4. Turn off the ignition.

5. Inspect the flat tire.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant kitand the tire has been separatedfrom the wheel, has damagedsidewalls, or has a puncture largerthan 6 mm (0.25 in), the tire is tooseverely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. If the tire has a punctureless than 6 mm (0.25 in) in the treadarea of the tire, see Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 10-70.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area that

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

has no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9-26.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.


Vehicle Care 10-71

{ Warning

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire or tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

To obtain a tire sealant andcompressor kit, see your dealer.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate anunderinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13-5.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:


10-72 Vehicle Care

1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Airor Air Only)

2. On/Off Button3. Pressure Gauge4. Pressure Deflation Button5. Tire Sealant Canister6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)7. Air Only Hose (Black)8. Power Plug9. Canister Release Button

(Under Sealant/Air Hose)

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hose

assembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.


2. On/Off Button


Vehicle Care 10-73

3. Pressure Gauge4. Pressure Deflation Button5. Tire Sealant Canister6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)7. Air Only Hose (Black)8. Power Plug9. Canister Release Button


When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-69 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10-78.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (8).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (8) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5-4.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press and turn the selectorswitch (1) counterclockwise tothe Sealant + Air position.


10-74 Vehicle Care

9. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (3) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (3). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10-55.

The pressure gauge (3) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. The

compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

{ Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13-5.

11. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12–18 must bedone immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (8) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose(6), and the power plug (8)back in their original location.


Vehicle Care 10-75

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (5) and place itin a highly visible location. Donot exceed the speed on thislabel until the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13-5.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (5) and sealant/airhose (6) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace with a new canisterassembly available from yourdealer.

23. After temporarily sealing thetire using the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:


2. On/Off Button

3. Pressure Gauge4. Pressure Deflation Button5. Tire Sealant Canister6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)7. Air Only Hose (Black)8. Power Plug9. Canister Release Button


If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-69 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10-78.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (7) andthe power plug (8).


Vehicle Care 10-77

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (7) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (8) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5-4.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press and turn the selectorswitch (1) clockwise to the AirOnly position.

9. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (3). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10-55.

The pressure gauge (3) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust the

excess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (4) until the properpressure reading is reached.This option is only functionalwhen using the air onlyhose (7).

11. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (8) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose(7) from the tire valve stem, byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (7)and the power plug (8) andcord back in its originallocation.


10-78 Vehicle Care

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton (9).

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kit,if equipped, should be stored in thestorage area behind the left rearwheel opening in the rearcompartment when it is notbeing used.

To access the storage area:

1. Open the hatch/trunk. See Hatch(Trunk) on page 2-14.

2. Lift the storage cover.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-33.

If the battery has run down, useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start the vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

The battery is under a battery coverin the hatch/trunk area on thepassenger side under the carpet.

Before you connect the cables, hereare some basic things you shouldknow. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) terminal. Negative (−)will go the negative (−) terminal.

1. Discharged BatteryPositive (+) Terminal

2. Discharged Battery Negative(−) Terminal

3. Good Battery Negative (−)Terminal

4. Good Battery Positive (+)Terminal

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.


10-80 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start thevehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or a

manual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrakes.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the rear hatch and lift thecarpet on the passenger side ofthe vehicle to gain access to thebattery cover.


Vehicle Care 10-81

5. Remove the battery cover andlocate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminals.

6. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

7. Open the positive terminal trimcover and connect the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal (1) of thedead battery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal (4) of thegood battery.

9. Now connect the black negative(−) cable to the negative (−)terminal (3) of the good battery.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal (2) on thedead battery.

11. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

The power windows may need to beinitialized. See “Window Indexing”under Power Windows onpage 2-22.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to any suspensioncomponents — including thecontrol arms, stabilizer bars, andlinks — during towing andrecovery of a disabled vehicle,or when securing the vehicle to aflatbed car carrier. For towing andrecovery of a disabled vehicle,use the proper hooks in thecorrect locations on the front andrear sub-frames. Use the propernylon strap harnesses around thetires to secure them to the flatbedcar carrier.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowing

{ Caution

Dolly towing or dinghy towing thevehicle may cause damagebecause of reduced groundclearance. Always put the vehicleon a flatbed truck or trailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If thevehicle must be towed, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10-82.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-83

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,comply with the car washinstructions. The windshield wipermust be off. Remove anyaccessories that may be damagedor interfere with the car washequipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)


10-84 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum and stainlesssteel. To prevent damage alwaysfollow these cleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum andstainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Convertible Top Care

Frequently hand wash convertibletops with mild car wash soap. Neveruse a stiff brush, steam, bleach,or aggressive cleaners.If necessary, a soft brush can beused to remove dirt. When finishedcleaning, thoroughly rinse the fabric.Avoid automatic car washes withoverhead brushes or veryhigh-pressure sprays as they cancause damage and leaking.

Only lower the top when it iscompletely dry and avoid leavingthe top lowered for extendedperiods of time to prevent excessiveinterior weathering.

Avoid leaving large amounts ofsnow on the top for extendedperiods of time as damage may alsooccur.

Carbon Fiber Care

Carbon fiber parts can be washedand waxed like any other parts. Usea clear or black pigmented wax. SeeCarbon Fiber on page 9-19.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesrequire more frequent application.Black marks from rubber material onpainted surfaces can be removed by


10-86 Vehicle Care

rubbing with a clean cloth. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges and liftgate hinges,unless the components are plastic.Applying silicone grease on


Vehicle Care 10-87

weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and falluse plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Composite Springs

{ Caution

Do not use acidic or corrosivecleaning products, enginedegreasers, or aluminum cleaningagents on fiberglass springs as itmay cause damage. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners.

Body Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregular

dark spots etched into the paintsurface. Refer to Finish Carepreviously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directly


10-88 Vehicle Care

on any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Fabric/Carpet/Suede/Sueded-Microfiber

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containing

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

these solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterefere with the accelerator or

brake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The floor mats are held in place bytwo retainers.

Installing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to remove it from theretainers.

2. Reinstall by lining up theopenings in the floor mat overthe retainers and push down intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


10-92 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Required Services are theresponsibility of the vehicle owner.It is recommended to have yourdealer perform these services every12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehiclemaintenance helps to keep thevehicle in good working condition,improves fuel economy, andreduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel on page 9-53.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-5.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-12.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-55.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-61.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-28.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle service



for up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-18.

Required Services Every12 000 km/7,500 mi. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-12 and EngineOil Life System on page 10-18.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-24.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-28.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-82. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-36.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-55.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-61.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-20.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-82.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-13.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-82.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-35.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-35.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-36.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.



. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Perform Required Services. Check engine oillevel and oil life percentage. Change engine oiland filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @

LT1 Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect sparkplug wires. @

LT4 Supercharged Engine: Replace spark plugs.Inspect spark plug wires. @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Change rear axle fluid. @ @ @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @

Replace clutch fluid. (6) @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System(Aero Panel) on page 10-23 orCooling System (Engine) onpage 10-22.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whicheveroccurs first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Perform Required Services. Check engine oillevel and oil life percentage. Change engine oiland filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change manual transmission fluid. @ @ @

LT1 Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect sparkplug wires. @

LT4 Supercharged Engine: Replace spark plugs.Inspect spark plug wires. @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Change rear axle fluid. @ @ @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @

Replace clutch fluid. (6) @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System(Aero Panel) on page 10-23 orCooling System (Engine) onpage 10-22.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-82.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-87 and Exterior Care onpage 10-82.



Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. For track events or competitive driving, use Mobil 1® engine oil.See Engine Oil on page 10-12.

Engine Coolant 40/60 coolant/water mixture of clean, drinkable water and use onlyDEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 10-24.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Clutch System Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GM Part No. 19299570, inCanada 19299571, Super DOT 4 brake fluid.

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19300536, inCanada 19300537).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).

Rear Axle DEXRON® LS Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862624, in Canada 88862625).See Rear Axle on page 10-34 for information on checking the fluid.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 23107355 A3191C

Engine Oil Filter 12640445 PF64

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 22862632 CF139



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Spark Plug

6.2L LT1 Engine 12622441 41–114

6.2L LT4 Supercharged Engine 12642722 41–128

Wiper Blades

Driver Side — 550 mm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Passenger Side — 500 mm (19.7 in) 22756330 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, under the carpet in thehatch/trunk area on the passengerside, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-12.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargetype and amount, see the refrigerant label underthe hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 10.7 L 11.3 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

6.2L LT1 Engine Except Z51 6.6 L 7.0 qt

6.2L LT1 Engine With Z51 9.3 L 9.8 qt

6.2L LT4 Supercharged Engine 9.3 L 9.8 qt

Fuel Tank 70.4 L 18.6 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order

6.2L V8 LT1 7 AutomaticManual

0.95–1.10 mm(0.037–0.043 in)

1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

6.2L LT4 Supercharged 6 AutomaticManual

0.725–0.875 mm(0.029–0.034 in)

1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

Engine Data

Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio

6.2L V8 Standard 455 460 lb ft 6.2L 11.5:1

6.2L V8 withPerformanceExhaust

460 465 lb ft 6.2L 11.5:1

6.2L V8Supercharged

650 650 lb ft 6.2L 10.0:1


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6.2L LT1 Engine

6.2L LT4 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,alerts, OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,

must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give

permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is

safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.



Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowed

by GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resale



value, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history of

these parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair

center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.



If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-19.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.



If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as in



connection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau , QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,



if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar Overview

Manual Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

Q Voice Command Button

| Blue OnStar Button

U Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connection, andDiagnostic Services. OnStar

services may require a paidsubscription. OnStar requires thevehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting public emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Termsand Conditions and PrivacyStatement for more details includingsystem limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Manual and AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirrors. Press the mirror controls.

If OnStar does not respond,adjust finger position or removeany gloves.

. Avoid touching the controls whileadjusting the mirror. To cancel acommand pressQ.


14-2 OnStar

. Clean the mirror while thevehicle is off to avoid makingcalls.

Status Indicator

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar controls on themanual rearview mirror.

If the status light is:. Solid Green: System is on.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.. Off: System is off. Press the blue

OnStar button twice to speakwith an OnStar Advisor.

For the automatic dimming rearviewmirror, the status is providedthrough the Display on DemandIcons.. Three Color Icons: The system

is enabled and active.. No Icons: The vehicle is in

motion or the OnStarsubscription is inactive

. Blinking: Button has beenpressed.

. Solid: On a call.

. ~ (Fault Icon On): Indicates aproblem.

OnStar Commands

Press| or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

PressQ to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires a specific OnStarsubscription plan.

. Obtain the WiFi network name,or Service Set Identifier or SSID,and passphrase (if equipped).

Press| to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Requires a specificOnStar subscription plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage WiFi Settings (ifequipped).

Press the OnStar Emergency buttonU to get a priority connection to anEmergency Advisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis and getevacuation routes.


OnStar 14-3

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the OnStar system canautomatically connect to an OnStarEmergency Advisor. The built-insystem can automatically connect tohelp in certain crashes.

PressU to connect to an OnStarEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can provideimportant information to emergencypersonnel. OnStar EmergencyAdvisors are trained to provideassistance and link to existingpublic emergency service providersin emergency situations.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Crisis Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information if acrisis occurs.

SecurityOnStar provides services includingStolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteIgnition Block, and RoadsideAssistance, if equipped. OnStar canunlock the vehicle doors remotely,if equipped with automatic doorlocks, and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

Press| to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. Press| to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat



14-4 OnStar

2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Subscribers cansend destinations fromMapQuest.com to the vehicleTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system (ifequipped). When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: Press|,then request the Advisor todownload directions to the

navigation system in the vehicle (ifequipped). After the call ends, pressthe “Go” button on the navigationscreen to begin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav andDestination Download, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe required specific Onstarsubscription plan includes theservices that follow to helpcustomers stay connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped)

The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot thatprovides a high-speed, wirelessInternet connection to connectmultiple mobile devices (data planrequired).

1. To retrieve WiFi hotspotinformation, pressQ and selector say “WiFi settings.”

2. The WiFi settings will display theWiFi network name/SSID,passphrase, and level ofencryption.

3. To change the SSID orpassphrase, press| or call1-888-4-ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® orWindows 7 or 8 mobile devices.From the mobile device, check thevehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire


OnStar 14-5

pressure (if the vehicle is equippedwith the tire pressure monitoringsystem); or activate remote hornand lights. Also remote start thevehicle (if factory equipped) orunlock the doors from anywherewith a wireless connection (ifequipped with automatic locks).With the required specific OnStarservice plan, a destination can besent to the vehicle. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar RemoteLink® Key FobServices

This feature is included for fiveyears and allows for remote doorlock/unlock (if equipped withautomatic locks), remote start (iffactory equipped), or activation ofhorn and lights from anywhere witha wireless signal. Download the appand start using it any time during thetrial period to get started.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

This service allows calls to be madeand received from the vehicle.

To Make a Call

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. PressQ. System responds:“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

PressQ. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”


14-6 OnStar

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

PressQ and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics canperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andother major vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded, press|, and an Advisorcan run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

Press| to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediatelyto terminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

Press| and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain theOnStar service options available.


OnStar 14-7

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.

(1-888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. Press| to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for service

in that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

Press| for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.


14-8 OnStar

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. The PIN will need to bechanged the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN contact anOnStar Advisor by pressing| orcalling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.Press| and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Do not place items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. Press| to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


OnStar 14-9

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-57. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or press| to speak with an

Advisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - softwareacknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/web/portal/getdocuments

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.


14-10 OnStar

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,

Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being


OnStar 14-11

Info-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


14-12 OnStar

2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-25Active Rev Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-20Air Dam, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Airbag System (cont'd)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-16AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-36Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-21


i-2 INDEX

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-18Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-38Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-32

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Competition Oriented Tires . . . 10-49Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-43Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


INDEX i-3

CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Cooling System . . . . . . . .10-22, 10-23Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data RecorderPerformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . 9-47Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-13Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Track Events andCompetitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Driving ModeCompetitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-35Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-21Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57


i-4 INDEX

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-7Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Cooling System . . . . . . 10-22, 10-23Cooling System Messages . . .5-37Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Engine (cont'd)Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-19Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-25Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-25Requirements, California . . . . .9-54System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38


INDEX i-5

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-52Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52

GaugesBoost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-26

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-57

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-37Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-21Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


i-6 INDEX

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-38Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-51LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18

Lamps (cont'd)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Lifting the Vehicle, Tires . . . . . . . 10-3LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-21Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-21Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-23

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Lights (cont'd)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . 9-47LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32


INDEX i-7

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

MatchingActive Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Messages (cont'd)Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-37Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-39Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Mirrors (cont'd)Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-21ModeDriver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4


i-8 INDEX

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-26Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® VehicleDiagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

PPanel, Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-20Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

Performance DataRecorder (PDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Power (cont'd)Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-51Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


INDEX i-9

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-26Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-14

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Ride Control SystemsEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-14Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-13

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-3Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-2Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . 3-33SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16


i-10 INDEX

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-5Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Special Application Services . . . 11-8Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-35Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-18Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Competition Oriented . . . . . . . 10-49Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-58Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-57Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Run-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-67When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-57Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-82Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Track Events andCompetitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . .9-47Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-52Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-44Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-78

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23


i-12 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-36

Owner's Manual - Chevrolet · PDF file2015 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M In Brief ......

Documents

Transcript of Owner's Manual - Chevrolet · PDF file2015 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M In Brief ......